Cambium Networks 89FT0022 900MHz MIMO Transceiver User Manual 450i 900MHzx
Cambium Networks Inc. 900MHz MIMO Transceiver 450i 900MHzx
Exhibit D Users Manual per 2 1033 b3
| Download: |  |
| Mirror Download [FCC.gov] | |
| Document ID | 2789079 |
| Application ID | F/AYrCagXS/f5+3VldVYHg== |
| Document Description | Exhibit D Users Manual per 2 1033 b3 |
| Short Term Confidential | No |
| Permanent Confidential | No |
| Supercede | No |
| Document Type | User Manual |
| Display Format | Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf |
| Filesize | 334.87kB (4185817 bits) |
| Date Submitted | 2015-10-21 00:00:00 |
| Date Available | 2016-03-01 00:00:00 |
| Creation Date | 2015-10-19 22:32:44 |
| Producing Software | Acrobat PDFMaker 15 for Word |
| Document Lastmod | 2015-10-19 17:32:45 |
| Document Title | Microsoft Word - 450i_900MHz.docx |
| Document Creator | Word |
33F
Cambium
PMP/PTP 450(i) Series
User Guide
System Release 14.1
pass
Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Cambium Networks
assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the
information obtained herein. Cambium reserves the right to make changes to any products described
herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to
make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions
or changes. Cambium does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any
product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights or
the rights of others. It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about
Cambium products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in
your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean that Cambium intends to
announce such Cambium products, programming, or services in your country.
Copyrights
This document, Cambium products, and 3rd Party software products described in this document may
include or describe copyrighted Cambium and other 3rd Party supplied computer programs stored in
semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for
Cambium, its licensors, and other 3rd Party supplied software certain exclusive rights for copyrighted
material, including the exclusive right to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative
works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any copyrighted material of Cambium, its licensors, or
the 3rd Party software supplied material contained in the Cambium products described in this
document may not be copied, reproduced, reverse engineered, distributed, merged or modified in any
manner without the express written permission of Cambium. Furthermore, the purchase of Cambium
products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any
license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Cambium or other 3rd Party supplied
software, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty free license to use that arises by operation of
law in the sale of a product.
Restrictions
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by
law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means,
without prior written permission of Cambium.
License Agreements
The software described in this document is the property of Cambium and its licensors. It is furnished
by express license agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an
agreement.
High Risk M aterials
Cambium and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of fitness for any
high risk activities or uses of its products including, but not limited to, the operation of nuclear
facilities, aircraft navigation or aircraft communication systems, air traffic control, life support, or
weapons systems (“High Risk Use”). Any High Risk is unauthorized, is made at your own risk and you
shall be responsible for any and all losses, damage or claims arising out of any High Risk Use.
© 2015 Cambium Networks Limited. All Rights Reserved.
pmp-0957_001v001 (October 2015)
Contents
About This User Guide ............................................................................................ 1
Contacting Cambium Networks ................................................................................................... 1
Purpose ........................................................................................................................................... 2
Cross references ............................................................................................................................ 2
Feedback ......................................................................................................................................... 2
Important regulatory information ....................................................................................................... 3
Application firmware ..................................................................................................................... 3
USA specific information .............................................................................................................. 3
Canada specific information ......................................................................................................... 4
Renseignements specifiques au Canada ..................................................................................... 5
EU Declaration of Conformity ....................................................................................................... 6
Specific expertise and training for professional installers ......................................................... 6
Ethernet networking skills ............................................................................................................. 6
Lightning protection ...................................................................................................................... 7
Training .......................................................................................................................................... 7
Problems and warranty ........................................................................................................................ 8
Reporting problems ....................................................................................................................... 8
Repair and service ......................................................................................................................... 8
Hardware warranty ........................................................................................................................ 8
Security advice ..................................................................................................................................... 9
Warnings, cautions, and notes .......................................................................................................... 10
Warnings ...................................................................................................................................... 10
Cautions ........................................................................................................................................ 10
Notes ............................................................................................................................................. 10
Caring for the environment ............................................................................................................... 11
In EU countries ............................................................................................................................. 11
In non-EU countries ..................................................................................................................... 11
Chapter 1:
Product description ........................................................................... 1-1
Overview of the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series .......................................................................................... 1-2
Purpose ....................................................................................................................................... 1-2
PMP/PTP 450i Series .................................................................................................................. 1-2
PMP/PTP 450 Series ................................................................................................................... 1-5
Supported interoperability for 450i/450/430 platforms .......................................................... 1-8
Typical deployment ................................................................................................................... 1-9
Product variants ....................................................................................................................... 1-10
Wireless operation ......................................................................................................................... 1-12
Time division duplexing .......................................................................................................... 1-12
Page i
Contents
MIMO ........................................................................................................................................ 1-15
Encryption ................................................................................................................................ 1-15
System management ..................................................................................................................... 1-16
Management agent ................................................................................................................. 1-16
Web server ............................................................................................................................... 1-16
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) ........................................................ 1-18
SNMP ........................................................................................................................................ 1-18
Network Time Protocol (NTP) ................................................................................................. 1-18
Wireless Manager (WM) ......................................................................................................... 1-19
Radio recovery mode – Radio Recovery Console / Default Mode (fka Default Plug) ......... 1-20
Chapter 2:
System hardware .............................................................................. 2-1
System Components ........................................................................................................................ 2-2
Point-to-Multipoint (PMP) ......................................................................................................... 2-2
Backhaul (PTP) ........................................................................................................................... 2-5
PMP/PTP 450(i) interfaces ......................................................................................................... 2-7
Diagnostic LEDs ....................................................................................................................... 2-11
ODU part numbers .................................................................................................................. 2-14
Power supply options .............................................................................................................. 2-20
ODU mounting brackets & accessories ................................................................................. 2-24
Lightning protection ................................................................................................................ 2-25
Cabling and lightning protection .................................................................................................. 2-26
ODU interfaces – PMP/PTP 450i .............................................................................................. 2-26
Ethernet standards and cable lengths ................................................................................... 2-27
Outdoor copper Cat5e Ethernet cable .................................................................................... 2-29
Main Ethernet port ................................................................................................................... 2-30
Aux port .................................................................................................................................... 2-30
Cable grounding kit ................................................................................................................. 2-32
Lightning protection unit (LPU) and grounding kit ............................................................... 2-32
Antennas and antenna cabling ...................................................................................................... 2-34
Antenna requirements ............................................................................................................ 2-34
Supported external AP antennas ........................................................................................... 2-34
Supported external SM antennas .......................................................................................... 2-34
RF cable and connectors ......................................................................................................... 2-35
Antenna accessories ................................................................................................................ 2-35
RJ45 connectors and spare glands ........................................................................................ 2-35
GPS synchronization ...................................................................................................................... 2-37
GPS synchronization description ........................................................................................... 2-37
Universal GPS (UGPS) ............................................................................................................ 2-37
CMM4 (Rack Mount) ............................................................................................................... 2-37
CMM4 (Cabinet with switch) ................................................................................................ 2-40
CMM4 (Cabinet without switch) ........................................................................................... 2-40
CMM4/CMMmicro ................................................................................................................... 2-40
Ordering the components .............................................................................................................. 2-42
Page ii
Contents
Chapter 3:
System planning ............................................................................... 3-1
Typical deployment .......................................................................................................................... 3-2
ODU with PoE interface to PSU ................................................................................................ 3-2
Site planning ..................................................................................................................................... 3-7
Site selection for PMP/PTP radios ............................................................................................ 3-7
Calculated distances and power compliance margin ............................................................. 3-7
Power supply site selection ...................................................................................................... 3-8
Maximum cable lengths ............................................................................................................ 3-8
Grounding and lightning protection ........................................................................................ 3-8
ODU and external antenna location ....................................................................................... 3-10
ODU ambient temperature limits ........................................................................................... 3-10
ODU wind loading ................................................................................................................... 3-11
Drop cable grounding points .................................................................................................. 3-12
LPU location ............................................................................................................................. 3-13
Radio Frequency planning ............................................................................................................. 3-14
Regulatory limits ...................................................................................................................... 3-14
Conforming to the limits ......................................................................................................... 3-14
Available spectrum .................................................................................................................. 3-15
Analyzing the RF Environment ............................................................................................... 3-15
Channel bandwidth ................................................................................................................. 3-15
Anticipating Reflection of Radio Waves ................................................................................ 3-16
Obstructions in the Fresnel Zone ........................................................................................... 3-16
Planning for co-location .......................................................................................................... 3-16
Multiple OFDM Access Point Clusters ................................................................................... 3-17
Link planning .................................................................................................................................. 3-19
Range and obstacles ............................................................................................................... 3-19
Path loss ................................................................................................................................... 3-19
Calculating Link Loss ............................................................................................................... 3-20
Calculating Rx Signal Level .................................................................................................... 3-20
Calculating Fade Margin ......................................................................................................... 3-21
Adaptive modulation ............................................................................................................... 3-21
Planning for connectorized units .................................................................................................. 3-22
When to install connectorized units ....................................................................................... 3-22
Choosing external antennas ................................................................................................... 3-22
Calculating RF cable length (5.8 GHz FCC only) .................................................................... 3-22
Data network planning ................................................................................................................... 3-24
Understanding addresses ....................................................................................................... 3-24
Dynamic or static addressing ................................................................................................. 3-24
DNS Client ................................................................................................................................ 3-25
Network Address Translation (NAT) ...................................................................................... 3-25
Developing an IP addressing scheme .................................................................................... 3-26
Address Resolution Protocol .................................................................................................. 3-26
Allocating subnets ................................................................................................................... 3-27
Page iii
Contents
Selecting non-routable IP addresses ..................................................................................... 3-27
Translation bridging ................................................................................................................ 3-28
Engineering VLANs ................................................................................................................. 3-28
Network management planning ................................................................................................... 3-32
Planning for SNMP operation ................................................................................................. 3-32
Enabling SNMP ........................................................................................................................ 3-32
Security planning ........................................................................................................................... 3-33
Isolating AP/BHM from the Internet ....................................................................................... 3-33
Encrypting radio transmissions .............................................................................................. 3-33
Planning for HTTPS operation ................................................................................................ 3-34
Planning for SNMPv3 operation ............................................................................................. 3-34
Managing module access by passwords ............................................................................... 3-35
Planning for RADIUS operation .............................................................................................. 3-36
Filtering protocols and ports .................................................................................................. 3-36
Encrypting downlink broadcasts ............................................................................................ 3-40
Isolating SMs in PMP .............................................................................................................. 3-40
Filtering management through Ethernet ............................................................................... 3-40
Allowing management from only specified IP addresses .................................................... 3-41
Configuring management IP by DHCP ................................................................................... 3-41
Controlling PPPoE PADI Downlink Forwarding ..................................................................... 3-41
Chapter 4:
Legal and regulatory information ...................................................... 4-1
Cambium Networks end user license agreement .......................................................................... 4-2
Definitions .................................................................................................................................. 4-2
Acceptance of this agreement .................................................................................................. 4-2
Grant of license .......................................................................................................................... 4-2
Conditions of use ....................................................................................................................... 4-3
Title and restrictions .................................................................................................................. 4-4
Confidentiality ............................................................................................................................ 4-4
Right to use Cambium’s name ................................................................................................. 4-5
Transfer ...................................................................................................................................... 4-5
Updates ...................................................................................................................................... 4-5
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................... 4-5
Disclaimer ................................................................................................................................... 4-6
Limitation of liability .................................................................................................................. 4-6
U.S. government ........................................................................................................................ 4-6
Term of license .......................................................................................................................... 4-7
Governing law ............................................................................................................................ 4-7
Assignment ................................................................................................................................ 4-7
Survival of provisions ............................................................................................................... 4-7
Entire agreement ....................................................................................................................... 4-7
Third party software .................................................................................................................. 4-7
Compliance with safety standards ................................................................................................ 4-22
Electrical safety compliance ................................................................................................... 4-22
Page iv
Contents
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliance ................................................................ 4-22
Human exposure to radio frequency energy ........................................................................ 4-22
Compliance with radio regulations ............................................................................................... 4-28
Type approvals ........................................................................................................................ 4-29
Brazil specific information ...................................................................................................... 4-29
Australia Notification ............................................................................................................... 4-30
Regulatory Requirements for CEPT Member States (www.cept.org) ................................. 4-30
Chapter 5:
Preparing for installation .................................................................. 5-1
Safety ................................................................................................................................................. 5-2
Power lines ................................................................................................................................. 5-2
Working at heights .................................................................................................................... 5-2
Power supply ............................................................................................................................. 5-2
Grounding and protective earth ............................................................................................... 5-2
Powering down before servicing ............................................................................................. 5-2
Primary disconnect device ........................................................................................................ 5-3
External cables ........................................................................................................................... 5-3
RF exposure near the antenna .................................................................................................. 5-3
Minimum separation distances ................................................................................................ 5-3
Grounding and lightning protection requirements ................................................................ 5-3
Grounding cable installation methods .................................................................................... 5-3
Siting ODUs and antennas ........................................................................................................ 5-4
Thermal Safety ........................................................................................................................... 5-4
Preparing for installation ................................................................................................................. 5-5
ODU pre-configuration .............................................................................................................. 5-5
Preparing personnel .................................................................................................................. 5-5
Preparing inventory ................................................................................................................... 5-5
Preparing tools ........................................................................................................................... 5-6
Testing system components ........................................................................................................... 5-7
Unpacking Components ............................................................................................................ 5-7
Preparing the ODU .................................................................................................................... 5-7
Configuring Link for Test ............................................................................................................... 5-15
Configuring the management PC ........................................................................................... 5-15
Logging into the web interface – AP/SM/BH ......................................................................... 5-16
Using the Quick Start Configuration Wizard of the AP/BHM ............................................... 5-16
Chapter 6:
Installation ....................................................................................... 6-1
ODU variants and mounting bracket options ............................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Mount the ODU, LPU and surge suppressor .............................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Attach ground cables to the ODU ........................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Mount the ODU on the mast ................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Mount the top LPU ................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Mount the Surge Suppressor ............................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
General protection installation ............................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Installing the copper Cat5e Ethernet interface ........................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Page v
Contents
Install the main drop cable ................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Install the bottom LPU to PSU drop cable ........................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Installing external antennas to a connectorized ODU ............... Error! Bookmark not defined.
PMP 450i Series ..................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
PMP 450 Series ...................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Attaching the PMP 450(i) AP and antenna to the mount point ........... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
PMP 450i Series 900 MHz AP ................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
PMP 450 Series 900 MHz SM ................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Installing an integrated ODU ....................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Connecting Cat5e Ethernet cable ................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Connecting an RJ45 and gland to a unit .............................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Disconnecting an RJ45 and gland from a unit .................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Installing ODU ............................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Installing an PMP 450(i) AP ................................................... Error! Bookm ark not defined.
Installing a PMP 450(i) SM .................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Installing a PTP 450(i) BHM ................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Installing a PTP 450(i) BHS .................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring the Link .............................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Monitoring the Link ............................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Installing the AC Power Injector .................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Installing the AC Power Injector ........................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Installing a GPS receiver .............................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
GPS receiver location ............................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Mounting the GPS receiver ................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Cabling the GPS Antenna ..................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Installing and connecting the GPS LPU ............................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Installing CMM4 ............................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Supplemental installation information ....................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Stripping drop cable .............................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Creating a drop cable grounding point ................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Attaching and weatherproofing an N type connector ........ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Chapter 7:
Configuration ................................................................................... 7-2
Preparing for configuration ......................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Safety precautions ................................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Regulatory compliance ......................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Connecting to the unit .................................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring the management PC ......................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Connecting to the PC and powering up ............................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Using the web interface ............................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Logging into the web interface ............................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Web GUI ................................................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Using the menu options ........................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Page vi
Contents
Quick link setup ............................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Initiating Quick Start Wizard ................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring time settings ..................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Viewing the Session Status of the AP/BHM to determine test registration .................... Error!
Bookmark not defined.
Configuring IP and Ethernet interfaces ....................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring the IP interface .................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
NAT, DHCP Server, DHCP Client and DMZ .......................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
DHCP – BHS ............................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Reconnecting to the management PC ................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
VLAN Remarking and Priority bits configuration – AP/SM .. Error! Bookmark not defined.
VLAN configuration for PTP ..................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
PPPoE page of SM ................................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
IP4 and IPv6 ............................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Upgrading the software version and using CNUT .................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Checking the installed software version .............................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Upgrading to a new software version ................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
General configuration .................................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
PMP/PTP 450i Series .............................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
PMP/PTP 450 Series ............................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring Unit Settings page ................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Setting up time and date ............................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Time page of PMP/PTP 450(i) AP/BHM ................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring synchronization ....................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring security ..................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Managing module access by password .............................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Isolating from the internet – APs/BHMs ............................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Encrypting radio transmissions ............................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Requiring SM Authentication ............................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Filtering protocols and ports ................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Encrypting downlink broadcasts .......................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Isolating SMs ......................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Filtering management through Ethernet ............................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Allowing management only from specified IP addresses .. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Restricting radio Telnet access over the RF interface ......... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring SNMP Access .................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring Security ............................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring radio parameters ..................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
PMP/PTP 450i – Configurating radio .................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
PMP/PTP 450 – Configurating radio ..................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Custom Frequencies page .................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
DFS for 5 GHz Radios ............................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
MIMO-A mode of operation for PMP/PTP 450(i) Series ...... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Page vii
Contents
Improved PPS performance of PMP 450(i) SMs ................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Setting up SNMP agent ............................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring SM/BHS’s IP over-the-air access ..................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring SNMP ................................................................. Error! Bookm ark not defined.
Configuring syslog ....................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Syslog event logging ............................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring system logging ................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring remote access .......................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Accessing SM/BHS over-the-air by Web Proxy ................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Monitoring the Link ...................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Link monitoring procedure ................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Exporting Session Status page of AP/BHM ......................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring quality of service ..................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Parameters ................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Token Bucket Algorithm ........................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
MIR Data Entry Checking ...................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Committed Information Rate (CIR) ....................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Bandwidth from the SM Perspective ................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interaction of Burst Allocation and Sustained Data Rate Settings ..... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
High-priority Bandwidth ........................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Traffic Scheduling .................................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Setting the Configuration Source ......................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring Quality of Service (QoS) .................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Installation Color Code ................................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Zero Touch Configuration Using DHCP Option 66 .................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuration Steps ............................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Troubleshooting .................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring Radio via config file ................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Import and Export of config file ........................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring a RADIUS server ...................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Understanding RADIUS for PMP 450(i) ............................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Choosing Authentication Mode and Configuring for Authentication Servers - AP .. Error!
Bookmark not defined.
SM Authentication Mode – Require RADIUS or Follow AP ............ Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Handling Certificates ............................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring RADIUS servers for SM authentication .......... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Assigning SM management IP addressing via RADIUS .... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Configuring RADIUS server for SM configuration .............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Using RADIUS for centralized AP and SM user name and password management ..... Error!
Bookmark not defined.
RADIUS Device Data Accounting ......................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
RADIUS Device Re-authentication ....................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Page viii
Contents
Chapter 8:
Tools ................................................................................................ 8-3
Using Spectrum Analyzer tool .................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Mapping RF Neighbor Frequencies ..................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Spectrum Analyzer tool ......................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Remote Spectrum Analyzer tool .......................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Using the Alignment Tool ............................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Alignment Tool and Diagnostic LED – SM/BHS .................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Alignment Tone ..................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Using the Link Capacity Test tool ................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Performing link capacity test ................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Link Capacity Test page of AP/SM ....................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Link Capacity Test page of BHM/BHS .................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Using AP Evaluation tool ............................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
AP Evaluation page of AP ..................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Using BHM Evaluation tool ......................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
BHM Evaluation page of BHM .............................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Using the OFDM Frame Calculator tool ...................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Using the Subscriber Configuration tool .................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Using the Link Status tool ............................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Using BER Results tool ................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Using the Sessions tool ............................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Chapter 9:
Operation ........................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
System information ...................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Viewing General Status ......................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Viewing Session Status ......................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Viewing Remote Subscribers ............................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting messages in the Event Log .............................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Viewing the Network Interface ............................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Viewing the Layer 2 Neighbors ............................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
System statistics ........................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Viewing the Scheduler statistics .......................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Viewing list of Registration Failures statistics ..................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting Bridging Table statistics ................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting Translation Table statistics .............................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting Ethernet statistics ............................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting RF Control Block statistics ................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting VLAN statistics .................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting Data VC statistics .............................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting Throughput statistics ........................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting Overload statistics ............................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting DHCP Relay statistics ........................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting Filter statistics ................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Viewing ARP statistics ........................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Page ix
Contents
Viewing NAT statistics .......................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Viewing NAT DHCP Statistics ............................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting Sync Status statistics ........................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting PPPoE Statistics for Customer Activities ........ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting Bridge Control Block statistics ......................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting Pass Through Statistics .................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting SNMPv3 Statistics ............................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting syslog statistics ................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Interpreting Frame Utilization statistics ............................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Radio Recovery ............................................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Recovery Console – PMP/PTP 450i ....................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Overriding Forgotten IP Address or Password - PMP/PTP 450 ........... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Chapter 10:
Reference Information ..................................................................... 9-1
Equipment specifications ................................................................................................................. 9-2
Specifications for PMP 450i AP ................................................................................................ 9-2
Specifications for PMP 450i SM ............................................................................................... 9-6
Specifications for PTP 450i BH ............................................................................................... 9-10
Specifications for PMP 450 AP ............................................................................................... 9-13
Specifications for PMP 450 SM .............................................................................................. 9-17
PSU specifications ................................................................................................................... 9-21
Data network specifications ........................................................................................................... 9-23
Ethernet interface .................................................................................................................... 9-23
Wireless specifications ................................................................................................................... 9-24
General wireless specifications .............................................................................................. 9-24
Link Range ................................................................................................................................ 9-25
Link Budget .............................................................................................................................. 9-31
Country specific radio regulations ................................................................................................ 9-34
Type approvals ........................................................................................................................ 9-34
DFS for 5 GHz Radios .............................................................................................................. 9-35
Country specific maximum transmit power .......................................................................... 9-36
Country specific frequency range .......................................................................................... 9-39
FCC specific information ......................................................................................................... 9-41
Industry Canada (IC) specific information ............................................................................. 9-44
Equipment Disposal ....................................................................................................................... 9-49
Waste (Disposal) of Electronic and Electric Equipment ....................................................... 9-49
Chapter 11:
Troubleshooting ............................................................................ 10-1
General troubleshooting procedure ............................................................................................. 10-2
General planning for troubleshooting ................................................................................... 10-2
General fault isolation process ............................................................................................... 10-3
Secondary Steps ...................................................................................................................... 10-4
Troubleshooting procedures ......................................................................................................... 10-5
Module has lost or does not establish connectivity ............................................................. 10-5
Page x
Contents
NAT/DHCP-configured SM has lost or does not establish connectivity ............................. 10-7
SM Does Not Register to an AP .............................................................................................. 10-9
Module has lost or does not gain sync ................................................................................ 10-10
Module does not establish Ethernet connectivity ............................................................... 10-11
CMM4 does not pass proper GPS sync to connected modules ........................................ 10-12
Module Software Cannot be Upgraded ............................................................................... 10-13
Module Functions Properly, Except Web Interface Became Inaccessible ........................ 10-13
Power-up troubleshooting ........................................................................................................... 10-14
Registration and connectivity troubleshooting .......................................................................... 10-15
SM/BMS Registration ............................................................................................................ 10-15
Glossary .................................................................................................................. I
Page xi
List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure 1 PMP/PTP 450(i) Series typical bridge deployment ............................................... 1-9
Figure 2 TDD frame division .............................................................................................. 1-12
Figure 3 Radio diagnostic LEDs, viewed from unit front................................................... 2-11
Figure 4 AC Power Injector interfaces .............................................................................. 2-21
Figure 5 AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector interfaces ...................................................... 2-22
Figure 6 -48 V DC Power Injector interfaces ..................................................................... 2-23
Figure 7 ODU rear interfaces ........................................................................................... 2-26
Figure 8 Connectorized ODU antenna interfaces .............................................................. 2-27
Figure 9 Outdoor drop cable.............................................................................................. 2-29
Figure 10 Alignment Tone Cable ....................................................................................... 2-31
Figure 11 Cable grounding kit ........................................................................................... 2-32
Figure 12 Cable gland........................................................................................................ 2-35
Figure 13 UGPS ................................................................................................................. 2-37
Figure 14 CMM4 (Rack Mount) ......................................................................................... 2-38
Figure 15 CMM4 56V power adapter ................................................................................ 2-38
Figure 16 CMM4 power adapter cabling diagram ............................................................ 2-39
Figure 17 CMM4 (Cabinet with switch)............................................................................. 2-40
Figure 18 CMM3 ................................................................................................................ 2-41
Figure 19 Pole mounted CMM3 ......................................................................................... 2-41
Figure 20 Mast or tower installation ................................................................................... 3-2
Figure 21 Wall installation ................................................................................................... 3-3
Figure 22 Roof installation .................................................................................................. 3-4
Figure 23 GPS receiver wall installation ............................................................................. 3-5
Figure 24 GPS receiver tower or mast installation ............................................................. 3-6
Figure 25 Rolling sphere method to determine the lightning protection zones .................. 3-9
Figure 26 Example layout of 16 Access Point sectors (ABCD), 90 degree sectors ............ 3-17
Figure 27 Example layout of 6 Access Point sectors (ABC), 60 degree sectors ................ 3-18
Figure 28 Determinants in Rx signal level ......................................................................... 3-20
Figure 29 Cambium networks management domain ......................................................... 3-25
Figure 30 Example of IP address in Class B subnet .......................................................... 3-27
Figure 31 Categorical protocol filtering ........................................................................... 3-38
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
32
33
34
35
36
37
Pin 1 location ..................................................................................................... 5-10
Crossover Ethernet Cable ................................................................................. 5-12
Alignment tone cable pin configuration ............................................................ 5-14
RJ-11 pinout for the default plug ....................................................................... 5-14
1000SSH Surge Suppressor ................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
600SSH Surge Suppressor – inside .................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Page xii
List of Figures
Figure 38 Grounding cable minimum bend radius and angle ............. Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 39 Grounding and lightning protection on mast or tower........ Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 40 Grounding and lightning protection on wall ....... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 41 Grounding and lightning protection on building . Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 42 AP antenna parts ................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 43 Antenna top plate ................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 44 Attaching antenna plate to the AP ...................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 45 Attaching the plate .............................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 46 Connect the port A and B to the PMP 450i AP .... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 47 AP antenna upper bracket assembly ................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 48 AP antenna upper bracket attached to upper adjustment arms Error! Bookmark
not defined.
Figure 49 Rear strap connected to upper AP antenna bracket .......... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 50 Assembled upper bracket connected to AP antenna ......... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 51 AP Antenna Lower Bracket Assembly ................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 52 Lower bracket attached to AP antenna ............... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 53 Completed AP and antenna assembly ................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 54 PMP 450 AP antenna parts.................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 55 AP antenna upper bracket assembly .................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 56 AP antenna upper bracket attached to upper adjustment arms ................. Error!
Bookmark not defined.
Figure 57 Rear strap connected to upper AP antenna bracket .......... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 58 Assembled upper bracket connected to AP antenna ........ Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 59 AP Antenna Lower Bracket Assembly ............... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 60 Lower bracket attached to AP antenna .............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 61 Attaching bracket to the rear of the AP ............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 62 Lower bracket attached to AP antenna .............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 63 Mounted PMP 450 AP and antenna assembly, viewed from back and back
........................................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 64 Attaching the AP antenna upper bracket to the pole .......... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 65 Attaching the AP antenna lower bracket to the pole .......... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 66 Variables for calculating angle of elevation (and depression) ... Error! Bookmark
not defined.
Figure 67 Mounting PMP 450i 900 MHz AP on the antenna .............. Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 68 AP antenna upper bracket attached to upper adjustment arms ................. Error!
Bookmark not defined.
Figure 69 Rear strap connected to upper AP antenna bracket .......... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Page xiii
List of Figures
Figure 70 Attaching radio mounting PMP 450i 900 MHz AP antenna to the pole ...... Error!
Bookmark not defined.
Figure 71 Fixing PMP 450i 900 MHz AP antenna to the pole ........... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 72 900 MHz sector antenna alignment .................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 73 PMP 450i 900 MHz SM external directional antenna ......... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 74 Attach the antenna to the pole.......................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 75 Fixing the nuts .................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 76 Fixing the radio to the antenna ........................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 77 Connecting RF cable to the radio ........................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 78 Yagi antenn alignment - horizentaly.................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 79 Yagi antenna alignment - upward tilt ................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 80 Yagi antenna alignment - downward tilt ............ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 81 Fixing the mounting plate to the back of the ODU ............. Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 82 Attaching the bracket body ................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 83 Ethernet cable gland for PMP/PTP 450 Series ... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 84 GPS antenna mounting ........................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 85 CMM4 cabled to support PMP/PTP 450(i) .......... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 86 Disarm Installation page (top and bottom of page shown) . Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 87 Regional Settings tab of AP/BHM ....................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 88 Radio Carrier Frequency tab of AP/BHM ............ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 89 Synchronization tab of AP/BHM .......................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 90 LAN IP Address tab of the AP/BHM .................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 91 Review and Save Configuration tab of the AP/BHM ........... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 92 Time tab of the AP/BHM ...................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 93 Time and date entry formats ............................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 94 Session Status tab of AP ...................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 95 NAT disabled implementation ............................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 96 NAT with DHCP client and DHCP server implementation .. Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 97 NAT with DHCP client implementation ............... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 98 NAT with DHCP server implementation.............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 99 NAT without DHCP implementation ................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 100 General page attributes - PMP 450 AP .............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 101 General page of PMP 450 SM ........................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 102 Sync Setting configuration ................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 103 AP Evaluation Configuration parameter of Security tab for PMP ............... Error!
Bookmark not defined.
Figure 104 BHM Evaluation Configuration parameter of Security tab for PTP ............ Error!
Bookmark not defined.
Figure 105 RF Telnet Access Restrictions (orange) and Flow through (green) ............ Error!
Bookmark not defined.
Page xiv
List of Figures
Figure 106 RF Telnet Access Restriction (orange) and Potential Security Hole (green)
........................................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 107 Multicast VC statistics ....................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 108 Multicast scheduler statistics ............................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 109 AP DFS Status .................................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 110 AP Session Status page ..................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 111 AP Remote Subscribers page ............................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 112 Session Status page .......................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 113 Exporting Session Status page of PMP 450i AP Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 114 Exporting Session Status page of PMP 450 AP . Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 115 Exporting Session Status page of PTP 450i BHM ............. Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 116 Uplink and downlink rate caps adjusted to apply aggregate cap ............... Error!
Bookmark not defined.
Figure 117 Uplink and downlink rate cap adjustment example .......... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 118 Installation Color Code of AP ............................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 119 Configuration File upload and download page.. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 120 SM Certificate Management ............................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 121 User Authentication and Access Tracking tab of the AP ... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 122 User Authentication and Access Tracking tab of the SM .. Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 123 RADIUS accounting messages configuration .... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 124 Device re-authentication configuration ............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 125 Spectrum analysis - Results .............................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 126 Spectrum Analyzer page result – PMP 450 SM . Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 127 Alignment Tool tab of SM – Receive Power Level > -70 dBm .. Error! Bookmark
not defined.
Figure 128 Alignment Tool tab of SM – Receive Power Level between -70 to -80 dBm Error!
Bookmark not defined.
Figure 129 Alignment Tool tab of SM – Receive Power Level < -80 dBm .. Error! Bookmark
not defined.
Figure 130 Link alignment tone .......................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 131 Link Capacity Test tab with 1714-byte packet length ....... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Figure 132 SM Configuration page of AP ............................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 133 BER Results tab of the SM ................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 134 Sessions tab of the AP ....................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 135 Remote Subscribers page of AP ........................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 136 Event log data ................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 137 Network Interface tab of the AP ....................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 138 Network Interface tab of the SM ...................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 139 Layer 2 Neighbors page .................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 140 Bridging Table page .......................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 141 Translation Table page of SM ........................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Page xv
List of Figures
Figure 142 ARP page of the SM........................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Figure 143 Recovery Options page ...................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Page xvi
List of Tables
List of Tables
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
1 Main characteristics of the PMP/PTP 450i Series .................................................. 1-3
2 PMP/PTP 450i Series hardware configurations ...................................................... 1-4
3 Main characteristics of the PMP/PTP 450 Series ................................................... 1-5
4 PMP/PTP 450 Series hardware configurations ....................................................... 1-7
5 Supported Interoperability for PMP ...................................................................... 1-8
6 Supported Interoperability for PTP ........................................................................ 1-8
7 Modulation levels .................................................................................................. 1-14
8 PMP 450i variants ................................................................................................... 2-3
9 PMP 450 variants .................................................................................................... 2-4
10 PTP 450i variants .................................................................................................. 2-5
11 PTP 450 variants ................................................................................................... 2-6
12 AP/SM/BH interface descriptions and cabling ...................................................... 2-7
13 AP interface descriptions and cabling – 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz ...................................... 2-8
14 AP/BHM LED descriptions .................................................................................. 2-12
15 SM/BHS LED descriptions .................................................................................. 2-13
16 PMP 450i ODU part numbers ............................................................................ 2-14
17 PTP 450i ODU part numbers .............................................................................. 2-15
18 PMP 450 ODU part numbers ............................................................................. 2-15
19 PTP 450 ODU part numbers ............................................................................... 2-17
20 PSU part numbers for PMP/PTP 450i ................................................................. 2-20
21 AC Power Injector interface functions ................................................................ 2-21
22 AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector interface functions........................................ 2-22
Table 23 -48V DC Power Injector interfaces .......................................................................... 2-23
Table 24 PSU part numbers for PMP/PTP 450 .................................................................. 2-23
Table 25 –Gigabit Enet Capable power supply ...................................................................... 2-23
Table 26 -120 W/30 VDC power supply ................................................................................ 2-24
Table 27 Accessories part numbers ................................................................................... 2-24
Table 28 Lightning protection part numbers ..................................................................... 2-25
Table 29 ODU rear interfaces ............................................................................................ 2-26
Table 30 PSU drop cable length restrictions ..................................................................... 2-28
Table 31 Drop cable part numbers .................................................................................... 2-29
Table 32 Main port PoE cable pinout................................................................................. 2-30
Table 33 Aux port PoE cable pinout................................................................................... 2-30
Table 34 Aux port PoE cable pinout................................................................................... 2-31
Table 35 Alignment tone adapter third party product details ........................................... 2-31
Table 36 Cable grounding kit part numbers ...................................................................... 2-32
Table 37 LPU and grounding kit contents ......................................................................... 2-33
Table 38 LPU and grounding kit part number ................................................................... 2-33
Page xvii
List of Tables
Table 39 List of AP external antennas ............................................................................... 2-34
Table 40 PMP 450(i) SM antenna ...................................................................................... 2-34
Table 41 RF cable and connector part numbers ................................................................ 2-35
Table 42 RJ45 connector and spare gland part numbers .................................................. 2-36
Table 43 CMM4 power adapter cable pinout .................................................................... 2-39
Table 44 PMP/PTP 450i components ................................................................................. 2-42
Table 45 ODU wind loading (Newton) ............................................................................... 3-11
Table 46 ODU wind loading (lb force) ............................................................................... 3-12
Table 47 Example 5.8 GHz 4-channel assignment by access site ...................................... 3-18
Table 48 Example 5.8 GHz 3-channel assignment by access site ...................................... 3-18
Table 49 RF cable lengths required to achieve 1.2 dB loss at 5.8 GHz ............................. 3-23
Table 50 Special case VLAN IDs ........................................................................................ 3-29
Table 51 VLAN filters in point-to-multipoint modules ....................................................... 3-30
Table 52 Q-in-Q Ethernet frame......................................................................................... 3-31
Table 53 HTTPS security material ..................................................................................... 3-34
Table 54 Ports filtered per protocol selections .................................................................. 3-39
Table 55 Device default port numbers ............................................................................... 3-39
Table 56 PMP 450(i) safety compliance specifications ...................................................... 4-22
Table 57 EMC emissions compliance ................................................................................. 4-22
Table 58 FCC minimum safe distances – 900 MHz ............................................................ 4-25
Table 58 FCC minimum safe distances – 4.9 GHz and 5.8 GHz ........................................ 4-25
Table 59 IC minimum safe distances – 4.9 GHz and 5.8 GHz ............................................ 4-25
Table 60 Radio certifications ............................................................................................. 4-29
Table 61 Tools for PMP and PTP 450(i) equipment installation .......................................... 5-8
Table 62 Main port pinout ................................................................................................. 5-11
Table 63 Aux port pinout ................................................................................................... 5-11
Table 64 Straight-through Ethernet Cable ........................................................................ 5-12
Table 65 RJ-45 pinout for straight-through Ethernet cable ............................................... 5-12
Table 66 RJ-45 pinout for crossover Ethernet cable .......................................................... 5-13
Table 67 AP/BHM to UGPS cable pinout ........................................................................... 5-13
Table 68 PMP/PTP 450i ODU mounting bracket part numbers ........... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Table 69 PMP/PTP 450i ODU mounting bracket part numbers ........... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Table 70 RJ45 connector and cable color code .................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 71 Menu options and web pages ................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 72 Session Status Attributes – AP .............................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 73 Session Status > Configuration CIR configuration denotations .. Error! Bookmark
not defined.
Table 74 IP interface attributes ........................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 75 SM/BHS private IP and LUID ................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 76 IP attributes - SM with NAT disabled ................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 77 IP attributes - SM with NAT enabled .................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 78 NAT attributes - SM with NAT disabled ................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Page xviii
List of Tables
Table 79 NAT attributes - SM with NAT enabled ................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 80 SM DNS Options with NAT Enabled ..................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 81 NAT Port Mapping attributes - SM ....................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 82 VLAN Remarking Example .................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 83 AP/BHM VLAN tab attributes ............................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 84 Q-in-Q Ethernet frame........................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 85 SM VLAN attributes .............................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 86 SM VLAN Membership attributes ......................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 87 BHM VLAN page attributes .................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 88 BHS VLAN page attributes ................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 89 SM PPPoE attributes ............................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 90 DiffServ attributes – AP/BHM ............................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 91 Packet Filter Configuration attributes .................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 92 General page attributes – PMP 450i AP ................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 93 General page attributes – PMP 450i SM ............... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 94 General page attributes – PTP 450i BHM ............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 95 General page attributes – PTP 450i BHS .............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 96 Unit Settings attributes – PMP/PTP 450(i) AP/BHM ............. Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Table 97 SM Unit Settings attributes .................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 98 PMP/PTP 450(i) AP/BHM Time attributes ............ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 99 Add User page of account page - AP/ SM/BH ....... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 100 Delete User page - PMP/PTP 450(i) AP/ SM/BH . Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 101 Change User Setting page - PMP/PTP 450(i) AP/ SM/BH ... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Table 102 User page – PMP/PTP 450(i) AP/SM/BH ............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 103 AP/BHM Protocol Filtering attributes ................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 104 SM/BHS Protocol Filtering attributes ................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 105 Port Configuration attributes – AP/SM/BHM/BMS ............. Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Table 106 Security tab of the AP ......................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 107 Security attributes – PMP 450(i) SM .................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 108 Security attributes for PTP 450(i) BHS ............... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 109 PMP 450i AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz ................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 110 PMP 450i SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz .............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 111 PMP 450i AP Radio attributes - 900 MHz ........... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 112 PTP 450i BHM Radio page attributes – 5 GHz .... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 113 PTP 450 BHM Radio page attributs – 5 GHz....... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 114 PTP 450i BHS Radio attributes – 5 GHz ............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 115 PTP 450 BHS Radio attributes – 5 GHz .............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 116 PMP 450 AP Radio attributes - 5 GHz ................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 117 PMP 450 AP Radio attributes - 3.65 GHz ............ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 118 PMP 450 AP Radio attributes - 3.5 GHz .............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 119 PMP 450 AP Radio attributes - 2.4 GHz .............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Page xix
List of Tables
Table 120 PMP 450 SM Radio attributes – 5 GHz ............... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 121 PMP 450 SM Radio attributes – 3.65 GHz .......... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 122 PMP 450 SM Radio attributes – 3.5 GHz ............ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 123 PMP 450 SM Radio attributes – 2.4 GHz ............ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 124 PMP 450 SM Radio attributes –900 MHz ........... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 125 Example for mix of multicast and unicast traffic scenarios Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Table 126 PMP/PTP 450(i) AP/SM/BH Custom Frequencies page – 5 GHz Error! Bookmark
not defined.
Table 127 PMP/PTP 450 SM/BH Custom Frequencies page – 3.65 GHz .... Error! Bookmark
not defined.
Table 128 PMP/PTP 450 SM/BH Custom Frequencies page – 3.5 GHz ...... Error! Bookmark
not defined.
Table 129 Contention slots and number of VCs ................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 130 PMP/PTP 450(i) Modulation levels ...................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 131 Co-channel Interference per (CCI) MCS, PMP/PTP 450(i) . Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Table 132 Adjacent Channel Interference (ACI) per MCS, PMP/PTP 450(i) ................. Error!
Bookmark not defined.
Table 133 LAN1 Network Interface Configuration tab of IP page attributes ................ Error!
Bookmark not defined.
Table 134 SNMP page attributes ......................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 135 Syslog parameters............................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 136 Syslog Configuration attributes - AP ................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 137 Syslog Configuration attributes - SM .................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 138 Syslog Configuration attributes - BHS ................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 139 Characteristics of traffic scheduling ................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 140 Recommended combined settings for typical operations ... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Table 141 Where feature values are obtained for a SM with authentication required . Error!
Bookmark not defined.
Table 142 MIR, VLAN, HPC, and CIR Configuration Sources, Authentication Disabled
........................................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 143 QoS page attributes - AP ..................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 144 QoS page attributes - SM .................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 145 QoS page attributes - BHM ................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 146 QoS page attributes - BHS .................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 147 Security tab attributes ........................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 148 SM Security tab attributes .................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 149 RADIUS Vendor Specific Attributes (VSAs) ........ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 150 AP User Authentication and Access Tracking attributes .... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Table 151 SM User Authentication and Access Tracking attributes ... Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Table 152 Device data accounting RADIUS attributes ........ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 153 Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - AP ............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Page xx
List of Tables
Table 154 Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - SM ............ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 155 Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - BHM ......... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 156 Spectrum Analyzer page attributes - BHS .......... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 157 Remote Spectrum Analyzer attributes - AP ........ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 158 Remote Spectrum Analyzer attributes - BHM ..... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 159 Alignment page attributes – SM.......................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 160 Alignment page attributes - BHS ........................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 161 Link Capacity Test page attributes - AP .............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 162 Link Capacity Test page attributes – BHM/BHS . Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 163 AP Evaluation tab attributes - AP ........................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 164 BHM Evaluation tab attributes - BHM ................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 165 OFDM Frame Calculator page attributes ........... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 166 OFDM Calculated Frame Results attributes ....... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 167 Color code vers uplink/downlink rate column ..... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 168 Link Status page attributes - AP ......................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 169 General Status page attributes - AP .................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 170 General Status page attributes - SM ................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 171 General Status page attributes - BHM ................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 172 General Status page attributes - BHS ................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 173 Device tab attributes ........................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 174 Session tab attributes ......................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 175 Power tab attributes ........................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 176 Configuration tab attributes ............................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 177 Event Log messages for abnormal events........... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 178 Event Log messages for normal events .............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 179 Scheduler tab attributes ..................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 180 SM Registration Failures page attributes - AP ... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 181 BHS Registration Failures page attributes - BHM .............. Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Table 182 Flags status ......................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 183 Ethernet tab attributes ....................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 184 Radio (Statistics) page attributes ....................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 185 VLAN page attributes.......................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 186 Data VC page attributes ...................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 187 RF overload Configuration attributes – AP/BHM Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 188 Overload page attributes – AP/SM/BHM/BHS .... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 189 DHCP Relay page attributes – AP/SM ................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 190 Filter page attributes - SM .................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 191 NAT page attributes - SM ................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 192 NAT DHCP Statistics page attributes - SM ......... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 193 Sync Status page attributes - AP......................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 194 PPPoE Statistics page attributes - SM ................ Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 195 Bridge Control Block page attributes – AP/SM/BHM/BHS . Error! Bookmark not
defined.
Page xxi
List of Tables
Table 196 Pass Through Statistics page attributes – AP ..... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 197 SNMPv3 Statistics page attributes – AP ............. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 198 Syslog statistics page attributes – AP/SM/BH ..... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 199 Frame utilization statistics .................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 200 Recovery Options attributes ............................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
Table 201 PMP 450i AP specifications ................................................................................. 9-2
Table 202 PMP 450i SM specifications ................................................................................ 9-6
Table 203 PTP 450i BH specifications ............................................................................... 9-10
Table 204 PMP 450 AP specifications ................................................................................ 9-13
Table 205 PMP 450 SM specifications ............................................................................... 9-17
Table 206 PMP/PTP 450i AC power Injector specifications .............................................. 9-21
Table 207 PMP/PTP 450 power supply specifications (part number: N000900L001A)..... 9-21
Table 208 PMP/PTP 450i Main and Aux Ethernet bridging specifications ........................ 9-23
Table 209 PMP/PTP 450 Ethernet bridging specifications ................................................ 9-23
Table 210 PMP/PTP 450(i) wireless specifications ............................................................ 9-24
Table 211 Link range – PMP 5.8 GHz link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth, 2.5 ms frame
duration, antenna gain of 17 dBi at AP and 23 dBi at the SM .................................... 9-25
Table 212 Link range – PTP 5.8 GHz link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth, 2.5 ms frame
duration, antenna gain of 23 dBi at each end ............................................................. 9-25
Table 213 Link range – PMP 5.8 GHz link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth, 2.5 ms frame
duration, antenna gain of 17 dBi at AP ....................................................................... 9-26
Table 214 Link range – PMP 5.4 GHz link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth, 2.5 ms frame
duration, antenna gain of 17 dBi at AP ....................................................................... 9-27
Table 215 Link range – PMP 2.4 GHz link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth, 2.5 ms frame
duration, antenna gain of 18 dBi at AP ....................................................................... 9-28
Table 216 Link range – PMP 3.5 GHz link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth, 2.5 ms frame
duration, antenna gain of 16 dBi at AP ....................................................................... 9-29
Table 217 Link range – PMP 3.5 GHz link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth, 2.5 ms frame
duration, antenna gain of 16 dBi at AP ....................................................................... 9-29
Table 218 Link range –20 MHz Channel Bandwidth, 2.5 ms frame duration .................... 9-30
Table 219 Link Budget – PMP 450, 1/16 Cyclic Prefix, 2.5 ms Frame Duration, 75/25 %
DL/UL Ratio, AP connected to one SM ......................................................................... 9-31
Table 220 Link Budget – PTP 450, 1/16 Cyclic Prefix, 2.5 ms Frame Duration, 75/25 %
DL/UL Ratio .................................................................................................................. 9-33
Table 221 Radio certifications .......................................................................................... 9-34
Table 222 Country & Bands DFS setting ........................................................................... 9-35
Table 223 Default combined transmit power per country – 4.9 GHz band........................ 9-36
Table 224 Default combined transmit power per Country Code – 5.1 GHz band ............. 9-37
Table 225 Default combined transmit power per country – 5.4 GHz band........................ 9-37
Table 226 Default combined transmit power per country – 5.8 GHz band........................ 9-38
Table 227 Frequency range per country – 4.9 GHz band .................................................. 9-39
Table 228 Frequency range per country – 5.4 GHz band .................................................. 9-40
Table 229 Frequency range per country – 5.8 GHz band .................................................. 9-40
Table 230 US FCC IDs ....................................................................................................... 9-41
Table 231 USA approved antenna list 4.9 GHz ................................................................. 9-42
Table 232 USA approved antenna list 5.1 and 5.2 GHz .................................................... 9-43
Page xxii
List of Tables
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
233
234
235
236
237
USA approved antenna list 5.4 GHz .................................................................. 9-43
USA approved antenna list 5.8 GHz .................................................................. 9-44
Industry Canada Certification Numbers ........................................................... 9-46
Canada approved antenna list 4.9 and 5.8 GHz ................................................ 9-47
Canada approved antenna list 5.2 and 5.4 GHz ............................................... 9-48
Page xxiii
About This User Guide
This guide describes the planning, installation, configuration and operation of the Cambium pointto-point and point-to-multipoint wireless Ethernet bridges. It covers PMP/PTP 450 and 450i series
platforms. In this document, the PMP/PTP 450 and 450i platform series will be referred as PMP/PTP
450(i). It is intended for use by the system designer, system installer and system administrator.
For radio network design, refer to the following chapters:
•
Chapter 1: Product description
•
Chapter 2: System hardware
•
Chapter 3: System planning
•
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
•
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
•
Chapter 6: Installation
For system configuration, tools and troubleshooting, refer to the following chapters:
•
Chapter 7: Configuration
•
Chapter 8: Tools
•
Error! Reference source not found.Error! Reference source not found.
•
Chapter 9: Reference Information
•
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Contacting Cambium Networks
Support website:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support
Main website:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com
Sales enquiries:
solutions@cambiumnetworks.com
Support enquiries:
support@cambiumnetworks.com
Repair enquiries:
rma@cambiumnetworks.com
Telephone number list:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/contact
Address:
Cambium Networks Limited,
Global Headquarters, 3800 Golf Road,
Suite 360, Rolling Meadows,
IL 60008 USA
Page 1
Chapter 1: Product description
Important regulatory information
Purpose
Cambium Networks Point-to-Multi-Point (PMP)/Point-To-Point (PTP) 450(i) Series documents are
intended to instruct and assist personnel in the operation, installation and maintenance of the
Cambium PMP/PTP equipment and ancillary devices of PMP/PTP 450 and 450i platform. It is
recommended that all personnel engaged in such activities be properly trained.
Cambium disclaims all liability whatsoever, implied or express, for any risk of damage, loss or
reduction in system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the customer, or
anyone acting on the customer's behalf, to abide by the instructions, system parameters, or
recommendations made in this document.
Cross references
References to external publications are shown in italics. Other cross references, emphasized in
blue text in electronic versions, are active links to the references.
This document is divided into numbered chapters that are divided into sections. Sections are not
numbered, but are individually named at the top of each page, and are listed in the table of
contents.
Feedback
We appreciate feedback from the users of our documents. This includes feedback on the structure,
content, accuracy, or completeness of our documents. Send feedback to
support@cambiumnetworks.com.
Page 2
Chapter 1: Product description
Important regulatory information
Important regulatory information
The PMP/PTP 450i and 450 products are certified as an unlicensed device in frequency bands
where it is not allowed to cause interference to licensed services (called primary users of the
bands).
Application firmware
Download the latest PMP/PTP 450(i) Series firmware and install it in the Outdoor Units (ODUs)
before deploying the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series equipment. Instructions for installing firmware are
provided in Error! Reference source not found. on page Error! Bookmark not defined..
USA specific information
Caution
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference, and
•
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation
The USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) requires manufacturers to implement
special features to prevent interference to weather radar systems that operate in the band 5600
MHz to 5650 MHz. These features must be implemented in all products able to operate outdoors in
the band 5470 MHz to 5725 MHz.
Manufacturers must ensure that such radio products cannot be configured to operate outside of
FCC rules; specifically it must not be possible to disable or modify the radar protection functions
that have been demonstrated to the FCC.
In order to comply with these FCC requirements, Cambium supplies variants of the PMP/PTP 450(i)
for operation in the USA. These variants are only allowed to operate with license keys that comply
with FCC rules.
To ensure compliance with FCC rules (KDB 905462 D04 Operational Modes for DFS Testing New
Rules v01), follow the recommendation in Avoidance of weather radars (USA only).
Page 3
Chapter 1: Product description
Important regulatory information
External antennas
When using a connectorized version of the product, the conducted transmit power may need to be
reduced to ensure the regulatory limit on transmitter EIRP is not exceeded. The installer must have
an understanding of how to compute the effective antenna gain from the actual antenna gain and
the feeder cable losses.
The range of permissible values for maximum antenna gain and feeder cable losses are included
in this user guide together with a sample calculation. The product GUI automatically applies the
correct conducted power limit to ensure that it is not possible for the installation to exceed the
EIRP limit, when the appropriate values for antenna gain and feeder cable losses are entered into
the GUI.
Avoidance of weather radars (USA only)
To comply with FCC rules (KDB 443999: Interim Plans to Approve UNII Devices Operating in the
5470 - 5725 MHz Band with Radar Detection and DFS Capabilities), units which are installed within
35 km (22 miles) of a Terminal Doppler Weather Radar (TDWR) system (or have a line of sight
propagation path to such a system) must be configured to avoid any frequency within +30 MHz or
–30 MHz of the frequency of the TDWR device. This requirement applies even if the master is
outside the 35 km (22 miles) radius but communicates with outdoor clients which may be within
the 35 km (22 miles) radius of the TDWRs. If interference is not eliminated, a distance limitation
based on line-of-sight from TDWR will need to be used. Devices with bandwidths greater than 20
MHz may require greater frequency separation.
When planning a link in the USA, visit http://spectrumbridge.com/udia/home.aspx, enter the
location of the planned link and search for TDWR radars. If a TDWR system is located within 35 km
(22 miles) or has line of sight propagation to the PTP device, perform the following tasks:
•
Register the installation on http://spectrumbridge.com/udia/home.aspx.
•
Make a list of channel center frequencies that must be barred, that is, those falling within
+30 MHz or –30 MHz of the frequency of the TDWR radars.
The PMP 450(i) AP must be configured to not operate on the affected channels.
Canada specific information
Caution
This device complies with Industry Canada’s license-exempt RSSs. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Industry Canada requires manufacturers to implement special features to prevent interference to
weather radar systems that operate in the band 5600 MHz to 5650 MHz. These features must be
implemented in all products able to operate outdoors in the band 5470 MHz to 5725 MHz.
Page 4
Chapter 1: Product description
Important regulatory information
Manufacturers must ensure that such radio products cannot be configured to operate outside of IC
rules; specifically it must not be possible to disable or modify the radar protection functions that
have been demonstrated to IC.
In order to comply with these IC requirements, Cambium supplies variants of the PMP/PTP 450(i)
for operation in Canada. These variants are only allowed to operate with license keys that comply
with IC rules. In particular, operation of radio channels overlapping the band 5600 MHz to
5650 MHz is not allowed and these channels are permanently barred.
In addition, other channels may also need to be barred when operating close to weather radar
installations.
Other variants of the PMP/PTP 450(i) are available for use in the rest of the world, but these
variants are not supplied to Canada except under strict controls, when they are needed for export
and deployment outside Canada.
Renseignements specifiques au Canada
Attention
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes :
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si
le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Industry Canada (IC) a demandé aux fabricants de mettre en œuvre des mécanismes spécifiques
pour éviter d’interférer avec des systèmes radar fonctionnant dans la bande 5600 MHz à 5650 MHz.
Ces mécanismes doivent être mis en œuvre dans tous les produits capables de fonctionner à
l'extérieur dans la bande 5470 MHz à 5725 MHz.
Les fabricants doivent s'assurer que les produits de radiocommunications ne peuvent pas être
configurés pour fonctionner en dehors des règles IC, en particulier, il ne doit pas être possible de
désactiver ou modifier les fonctions de protection des radars qui ont été démontrés à IC.
Afin de se conformer à ces exigences de IC, Cambium fournit des variantes du PMP/PTP 450(i)
exclusivement pour le Canada. Ces variantes ne permettent pas à l’équipement de fonctionner en
dehors des règles de IC. En particulier, le fonctionnement des canaux de radio qui chevauchent la
bande 5600-5650 MHz est interdite et ces canaux sont définitivement exclus.
IC Approved Antennas
The list of antennas used to obtain IC approvals is provided in section Country specific radio
regulations, Industry Canada (IC) , Table 104.
Page 5
Chapter 1: Product description
Important regulatory information
Antennas externes
Lorsque vous utilisez une version du produit sans antenne intégrée, il peut être nécessaire de
réduire la puissance d'émission pour garantir que la limite réglementaire de puissance isotrope
rayonnée équivalente (PIRE) n'est pas dépassée. L'installateur doit avoir une bonne
compréhension de la façon de calculer le gain de l'antenne réelle et les pertes dans les câbles de
connections.
La plage de valeurs admissibles pour un gain maximal de l'antenne et des pertes de câbles de
connections sont inclus dans ce guide d'utilisation avec un exemple de calcul. L'interface
utilisateur du produit applique automatiquement la limite de puissance menée correct afin de
s'assurer qu'il ne soit pas possible pour l'installation de dépasser la limite PIRE, lorsque les valeurs
appropriées pour le gain d'antenne et les pertes de câbles d'alimentation sont entrées dans
l’interface utilisateur.
Antennes approuvées par IC
La liste des antennas approveés pour l’operation au Canada est founie dans le chapitre Country
specific radio regulations, Industry Canada (IC) tableaux Table 104.
EU Declaration of Conformity
Hereby, Cambium Networks declares that the Cambium PMP/PTP 450(i) Series Wireless Ethernet
Bridge complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
1999/5/EC. The declaration of conformity may be consulted at:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/ec-doc
Specific expertise and training for professional
installers
To ensure that the PMP/PTP 450(i) is installed and configured in compliance with the requirements
of Industry Canada and the FCC, installers must have the radio engineering skills and training
described in this section.
The Cambium Networks technical training program details can be accessed from below link:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/training/category/technical-training/
Ethernet networking skills
The installer must have the ability to configure IP addressing on a PC and to set up and control
products using a web browser interface.
Page 6
Chapter 1: Product description
Important regulatory information
Lightning protection
To protect outdoor radio installations from the impact of lightning strikes, the installer must be
familiar with the normal procedures for site selection, bonding and grounding. Installation
guidelines for the PMP/PTP 450(i) can be found in Chapter 2: System hardware and Chapter 3:
System planning.
Training
The installer needs to have basic competence in radio and IP network installation. The specific
requirements applicable to the PMP/PTP 450(i) should be gained by reading Chapter 5: Preparing
for installation, Chapter 6: Installation, Chapter 7: Configuration, Chapter 8: Tools and Error!
Reference source not found.Error! Reference source not found.; and by performing
sample set ups at base workshop before live deployments.
The Cambium Networks technical training program details can be accessed from below link:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/training/category/technical-training/
Page 7
Chapter 1: Product description
Problems and warranty
Problems and warranty
Reporting problems
If any problems are encountered when installing or operating this equipment, follow this
procedure to investigate and report:
Search this document and the software release notes of supported releases.
Visit the support website.
Ask for assistance from the Cambium product supplier.
Gather information from affected units, such as any available diagnostic downloads.
Escalate the problem by emailing or telephoning support.
Repair and service
If unit failure is suspected, obtain details of the Return Material Authorization (RMA) process from
the support website (http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support).
Hardware warranty
Cambium’s standard hardware warranty is for one (1) year from date of shipment from Cambium
Networks or a Cambium distributor. Cambium Networks warrants that hardware will conform to
the relevant published specifications and will be free from material defects in material and
workmanship under normal use and service. Cambium shall within this time, at its own option,
either repair or replace the defective product within thirty (30) days of receipt of the defective
product. Repaired or replaced product will be subject to the original warranty period but not less
than thirty (30) days.
To register PMP and PTP products or activate warranties, visit the support website. For warranty
assistance, contact the reseller or distributor. The removal of the tamper-evident seal will void the
warranty.
Caution
Using non-Cambium parts for repair could damage the equipment or void warranty.
Contact Cambium for service and repair instructions.
Portions of Cambium equipment may be damaged from exposure to electrostatic
discharge. Use precautions to prevent damage.
Page 8
Chapter 1: Product description
Security advice
Security advice
Cambium Networks systems and equipment provide security parameters that can be configured
by the operator based on their particular operating environment. Cambium recommends setting
and using these parameters following industry recognized security practices. Security aspects to
be considered are protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of information and
assets. Assets include the ability to communicate, information about the nature of the
communications, and information about the parties involved.
In certain instances Cambium makes specific recommendations regarding security practices,
however the implementation of these recommendations and final responsibility for the security of
the system lies with the operator of the system.
Page 9
Chapter 1: Product description
Warnings, cautions, and notes
Warnings, cautions, and notes
The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this document and in all
documents of the Cambium Networks document set.
Warnings
Warnings precede instructions that contain potentially hazardous situations. Warnings are used to
alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life or physical injury. A warning has
the following format:
W arning
Warning text and consequence for not following the instructions in the warning.
Cautions
Cautions precede instructions and are used when there is a possibility of damage to systems,
software, or individual items of equipment within a system. However, this damage presents no
danger to personnel. A caution has the following format:
Caution
Caution text and consequence for not following the instructions in the caution.
Notes
A note means that there is a possibility of an undesirable situation or provides additional
information to help the reader understand a topic or concept. A note has the following format:
Note
Note text.
Page 10
Chapter 1: Product description
Caring for the environment
Caring for the environment
The following information describes national or regional requirements for the disposal of
Cambium Networks supplied equipment and for the approved disposal of surplus packaging.
In EU countries
The following information is provided to enable regulatory compliance with the European Union
(EU) directives identified and any amendments made to these directives when using Cambium
equipment in EU countries.
Disposal of Cambium equipment
European Union (EU) Directive 2002/96/EC Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
Do not dispose of Cambium equipment in landfill sites. For disposal instructions, refer to
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/weee-compliance
Disposal of surplus packaging
Do not dispose of surplus packaging in landfill sites. In the EU, it is the individual recipient’s
responsibility to ensure that packaging materials are collected and recycled according to the
requirements of EU environmental law.
In non-EU countries
In non-EU countries, dispose of Cambium equipment and all surplus packaging in accordance with
national and regional regulations.
Page 11
Chapter 1:
Product description
This chapter provides a high level description of products in the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series. It describes
in general terms the function of the product, the main product variants and the main hardware
components. The following topics are described in this chapter:
•
Overview of the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series on page 1-2 introduces the key features, typical uses,
product variants and components of the PMP/PTP 450i and 450 series platform.
•
Wireless operation on page 1-12 describes how the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series wireless link is
operated, including modulation modes and spectrum management.
•
System management on page 1-16 introduces the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series management system,
including the web interface, configuration, security, alerts and recovery.
Page 1-1
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series
Overview of the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series
This section introduces the key features, typical uses, product variants and components of the
PMP/PTP 450(i) series.
Purpose
Cambium PMP/PTP 450(i) Series products are designed for Ethernet bridging over point-to-point
and point-to-multipoint microwave links in unlicensed and lightly-licensed frequency bands
900MHz, 2.4 GHz, 3.5/3.65 GHz and 4.9 to 5.925 GHz.
Users must ensure that the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series complies with local operating regulations.
The PMP/PTP 450(i) Series acts as a transparent bridge between two or more segments of the
operator’s network. In this sense, it can be treated as a virtual wired connection among points. The
PMP/PTP 450(i) Series forwards 802.3 Ethernet frames destined for the other part of the network
and filters frames it does not need to forward. The system is transparent to higher-level protocols
such as VLANs.
PMP/PTP 450(i) Series platforms
The PMP/PTP 450(i) Series supports two platforms:
•
PMP/PTP 450i Series
•
PMP/PTP 450 Series
PMP/PTP 450i Series
The PMP/PTP 450i is a high performance wireless bridge for Ethernet traffic. It is capable of
operating in line-of-sight (LOS), near-LOS and non-LOS propagation condition. It supports 900
MHz and 4.9 to 5.925 GHz frequency band.
Key features
The PMP/PTP 450i Series has extensive quality of service (QoS) classification capability.
The Cambium PMP/PTP 450i Series offers the following benefits:
•
Cambium’s highest performing point-to-multipoint solution, with up to 129 Mbps usable
throughput for PMP and upto 132 Mbps usable throughput for PTP
•
State-of-the-art MIMO (Multi-In Multi-Out) technology
•
Better spectral efficiency than other MIMO alternatives
•
Increased Packet Processing rate
900 MHz support planned for future release.
Page 1-2
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series
•
Efficient GPS synchronized, scheduled TDD operation for easy AP/BHM site deployment and
performance that is consistent regardless of SM/BHS loading
•
A range of cost-effective subscriber device solutions to meet the business case of any network
application
•
MIMO Matrix B: This technique provides for the ability to double the throughput of a radio
transmission under proper RF conditions. Different data streams are transmitted
simultaneously on two different antennas.
•
MIMO-A mode: This mode of operation has same modulation levels as the MIMO-B mode,
namely: QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM and 256-QAM.
Table 1 gives a summary of the main PMP/PTP 450i characteristics.
Table 1 Main characteristics of the PMP/PTP 450i Series
Characteristic
Value
Topology
PMP/PTP
Wireless link condition
LOS, near LOS or non-LOS
Range
PTP : Up to 40 mi (or 64 km) depending on configuration
PMP: Up to 40 mi (or 64 km)
Duplexing
TDD (symmetric and asymmetric)
Connectivity
1000Base-T Ethernet Main port with PoE input
Operating frequencies
900 MHz
4.9 to 5.925 GHz
Tx Power
max 27 dBm ( 5 GHz)
max 25 dBm (900 MHz)
Channel bandwidth
5, 7, 10 and 20 MHz
High spectral efficiency
Up to 6.5 bps/Hz
Data rate
Up to 129 Mbps (20 MHz channel BW) for PMP
Up to 132 Mbps (20 MHz channel BW) for PTP
PTP range will be revised in next release.
900 MHz support planned for future release.
Page 1-3
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series
Frequency bands
The PMP/PTP 450i ODU can be configured by the user to operate in the following bands:
•
900 MHz band: 902 to 928 MHz(PMP only)
•
4.9 GHz band: 4900 to 5925 MHz
5.1 GHz band: 5150 to 5250 MHz
5.2 GHz band: 5250 to 5350 MHz
5.4 GHz band: 5470 to 5725 MHz
5.8 GHz band: 5725 to 5875 MHz
Hardware components
The ODU (Outdoor unit) is a self-contained transceiver unit that houses both radio and networking
electronics. The main hardware components of the PMP/PTP 450i are as follows:
•
PMP 450i AP
•
PMP 450i SM
•
PTP 450i BH (BHM/BHS)
The PMP/PTP 450i is supplied in the following configurations:
Table 2 PMP/PTP 450i Series hardware configurations
ODU
Frequency
PMP 450i AP
900 MHz
PMP 450i SM
PTP 450i BH
ODU type
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
4.9 to 5.925 GHz
Integrated
16 dBi, 90° sector antenna
(support 4.9, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4
and 5.8 GHz)
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
4.9 to 5.925 GHz
Integrated
23 dBi flat panel antenna
(support 4.9, 5.1, 5.2, 5.4
and 5.8 GHz)
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
4.9 to 5.925 GHz
Integrated
23 dBi flat panel antenna
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
900 MHz
Note
The BH ODU can be configured as a BHM or a BHS in PTP mode
Different hardware for PMP 450i 900 MHz and PMP/PTP 450i 4.9 GHz band ODUs
900 MHz support planned for future release.
900 MHz support planned for future release.
Page 1-4
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series
W arning
The PMP 450i AP 16 dBi, 90° sector antenna does not support frequency reuse
between collocated APs.
To achieve frequency re-use between collocated APs, please use the PMP 450i AP
Connectorized and external antennas.
For details on frequency planning, please see Radio Frequency planning on page 3-14.
PMP/PTP 450 Series
Cambium PMP/PTP 450 Series networks are designed for wireless point-to-multipoint and point-to7
point links in the unlicensed/licensed 900 MHz , 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz, 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz
bands. Users must ensure that the PMP/PTP 450 Series complies with local operating regulations.
The PMP/PTP 450 Series adds dramatically increased network throughput and capacity. The
PMP/PTP 450 Series enables network operators to grow their business by offering more capacity
for data, voice and video applications.
Key features
The Cambium PMP/PTP 450 Series offers the following benefits:
•
Cambium’s highest performing point-to-multipoint solution, with up to 125 Mbps usable
throughput
•
State-of-the-art MIMO (Multi-In Multi-Out) technology
•
Better spectral efficiency than other MIMO alternatives
•
Efficient GPS synchronized, scheduled TDD operation for easy Access Point site deployment
and performance that is consistent regardless of subscriber loading
•
A range of cost-effective subscriber device solutions to meet the business case of any network
application
•
MIMO Matrix B: This technique provides for the ability to double the throughput of a radio
transmission under proper RF conditions. Different data streams are transmitted
simultaneously on two different antennas.
•
MIMO-A mode – System Release 13.2 introduces this mode of operation using the same
modulation levels as the MIMO-B mode, namely: QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM and 256-QAM.
Table 3 gives a summary of the main PMP/PTP 450 characteristics.
Table 3 Main characteristics of the PMP/PTP 450 Series
Characteristic
Value
900 MHz support planned for future release.
Page 1-5
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series
Topology
PMP/PTP
Wireless link condition
LOS, near LOS or non-LOS
Range
PTP : Up to 40 mi (or 64 km) depending on configuration
PMP: Up to 40 mi (or 64 km)
Duplexing
TDD (symmetric and asymmetric)
Connectivity
100Base-T Ethernet Main port with PoE input
Operating frequencies
900 MHz , 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.65 GHz and 5 GHz
Tx Power
max 27 dBm (2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.65 GHz and 5 GHz)
max 25 dBm (900 MHz)
Channel bandwidth
5, 7, 10 and 20 MHz
High spectral efficiency
Up to 6.5 bps/Hz
Data rate
Up to 129 Mbps (20 MHz channel BW) for PMP
Up to 132 Mbps (20 MHz channel BW) for PTP
Frequency bands
The PMP/PTP 450 ODU can be configured by the user to operate in the following bands:
10
•
900 MHz
band: 902 to 928 MHz(SM only)
•
2.4 GHz band: 2400 to 2483 MHz
•
3.5/3.65 GHz band
•
5.4 GHz band: 5470 to 5725 MHz
•
5.8 GHz band: 5725 to 5875 MHz
Hardware components
The main hardware components of the PMP/PTP 450 are as follows:
•
PMP 450 AP
•
PMP 450 SM
•
PTP 450 BH (BHM/BHS)
The PMP/PTP 450 is supplied in the following configurations:
10
PTP range will be revised in next release.
900 MHz support planned for future release.
900 MHz support planned for future release.
Page 1-6
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series
Table 4 PMP/PTP 450 Series hardware configurations
ODU
Frequency
ODU type
PMP 450 AP
2.4 GH
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
Integrated
18 dBi Dual Slant
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
Integrated
16 dBi Dual Slant
5 GHz
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
(5.4 and 5.8 GHz)
Integrated
17 dBi Dual Slant
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
Integrated
7 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
Integrated
8 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch
5 GHz
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
(5.4 and 5.8 GHz)
Integrated
9 dBi H+V, integrated patch
3.5/3.65 GHz
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
Integrated
16 dBi Dual Slant
5 GHz
Connectorized
Use with an external antenna
(5.4 and 5.8 GHz)
Integrated
17 dBi Dual Slant
3.5/3.65 GHz
PMP 450 SM
900 MHz
11
2.4 GH
3.5/3.65 GHz
PTP 450 BH
Note
The BH ODU can be configured as a BHM or a BHS in PTP mode
11
900 MHz support planned for future release.
Page 1-7
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series
Supported interoperability for 450i/450/430 platforms
The supported interoperability among various 450i/450/430 hardware platforms are listed below:
Table 5 Supported Interoperability for PMP
Band
AP platform
SM platform
4.9, 5.1, 5.2 and 5.9 GHz
PMP 450i AP
PMP 450i SM (Greenfield)
5.4 and 5.8 GHz
2.4 GHz and 3.5/3.65 GHz
PMP 450i AP
PMP 450i SM, PMP 450 SM, PMP 430 SM
PMP 450 AP
PMP 450 AP
PMP 450 SM
PMP 450 SM
PMP 450i AP
900 MHz
(5, 7 and 10 MHz Channel BW ONLY)
12
PMP 450i SM (Greenfield)
PMP 450i AP
(20 MHz Channel BW ONLY)
Table 6 Supported Interoperability for PTP
Band
BH platform
4.9, 5.1, 5.2 and 5.9 GHz
PMP 450i BHM and BHS
5.4 and 5.8 GHz
PMP 450 BHM and BHS
3.5/3.65 GHz
PMP 450 BHM and BHS
12
900 MHz support planned for future release.
Page 1-8
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series
Typical deployment
The PMP/PTP 450(i) Series is an “all outdoor” solution consisting of a wireless bridge across sites.
Each site installation consists of an Integrated or Connectorized outdoor unit (ODU) and a power
supply (PSU) (see Figure 1). The ODU provides the following interfaces:
•
Ethernet port: This provides proprietary power over Ethernet and connection to the
management and/or data networks.
Figure 1 PMP/PTP 450(i) Series typical bridge deployment
Building 1
Building 2
ODU
Lightning
protection units
ODU
Power over Ethernet
interface
PSU
Lightning
protection units
PSU
AC supply
AC supply
Network
equipment
Network
equipment
Page 1-9
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series
Point-to-Multipoint
The PMP 450(i) Series consists of Access Point (AP) and Subscriber Module (SM) ODU. The radio
link operates on a single frequency channel in each direction using Time Division Duplex (TDD).
Applications for the PMP 450(i) Series include:
•
High throughput enterprise applications
•
nLOS video surveillance in metro areas
•
Urban area network extension
•
Network extension into areas with foliage
Point-to-Point (Backhaul)
The PTP 450(i) Series consists of two BH (Backhaul) ODUs. The customer can decide, via software
configuration, if this unit is a BHM (Backhaul Master) or a BHS (Backhaul Slave). The radio link
operates on a single frequency channel using Time Division Duplex (TDD).
Applications for the PTP 450(i) Series include:
•
Enterprise Access
•
nLOS video surveillance
•
Leased line replacements and backup solutions
•
Network extension
Product variants
The PMP 450(i) Series is available in the following product variants:
•
The ODU is supplied in the following regional variants:
FCC, intended for deployment in the USA
EU, intended for deployment in countries of the European Union or other countries
following ETSI regulations
Rest of the World (RoW), intended for deployment in countries other than USA and EU
countries.
IC, intended for deployment in Canada
•
An indoor power supply module providing Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) supply to ODU
(AP/SM/BH).
•
Antennas and antenna cabling: Connectorized ODUs require external antennas connected
using RF cable.
•
Ethernet cabling: All configurations require a copper Ethernet Cat5e connection from the ODU
(Ethernet port) to the PoE.
•
Lightning protection unit (LPU): LPUs are installed in the ports copper drop cables to provide
transient voltage surge suppression.
•
Ground cables: ODU, LPUs and outdoor copper Ethernet cables are bonded to the site
grounding system using ground cables.
Page 1-10
Chapter 1: Product description
Overview of the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series
For more information about these components, including interfaces, specifications and Cambium
part numbers, refer to Chapter 2: System hardware.
Page 1-11
Chapter 1: Product description
Wireless operation
Wireless operation
This section describes how the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series wireless link is operated, including
modulation modes, power control and security.
Time division duplexing
The system uses Time Division Duplexing (TDD) – one channel alternately transmits and receives
rather than using one channel for transmitting and a second channel for receiving. To accomplish
TDD, the AP/BHM must provide sync to its BHS. Furthermore, collocated APs/BHMs must be
synced together – an unsynchronized AP/BHM that transmits during the receive cycle of a
collocated AP/BHM can prevent a second AP/BHM from being able to decode the signals from its
APs/BHSs. In addition, across a geographical area, APs/BHMs that can “hear” each other benefit
from using a common sync to further reduce self-interference within the network.
Modules use TDD on a common frequency to divide frames for uplink (orange) and downlink
(green) usage, as shown in the figure below.
For more information on synchronization configuration options, see GPS synchronization on page
2-37.
Figure 2 TDD frame division
Time
Page 1-12
Chapter 1: Product description
Wireless operation
TDD frame parameters
The TDD burst duration varies depending on the following:
•
Channel Bandwidth
•
Cyclic Prefix
•
Frame Period
•
Frame configuration - Downlink Data
•
Link operation – Dynamic Rate Adaptation
OFDM and channel bandwidth
The PMP/PTP 450(i) series transmits using Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM).
This wideband signal consists of many equally spaced sub-carriers. Although each sub carrier is
modulated at a low rate using conventional modulation schemes, the resultant data rate from the
sub-carriers is high. OFDM works exceptionally over a Non-Line-of-Sight (NLoS) channel.
The channel bandwidth of the OFDM signal is configurable to one of the following values: 5, 10
and 20 MHz. Higher bandwidths provide greater link capacity at the expense of using more
bandwidth. Systems configured for a narrower channel bandwidth provide better receiver
sensitivity and can also be an appropriate choice in deployments where the amount of free
spectrum is limited.
Note
The Channel Bandwidth must be configured to the same value at both ends of the link.
Not all channel bandwidths are available in all regulatory bands.
Cyclic Prefix
OFDM technology uses a cyclic prefix, where a portion of the end of a symbol (slot) is repeated at
the beginning of the symbol (slot) to allow multi-pathing to settle before receiving the desired
data. A 1/16 cyclic prefix means that for every 16 bits of throughput data transmitted, an additional
bit is used.
Frame Period
The frame period or frame duration is the time between the beginning of a frame and the end of
the frame. The PMP/PTP 450(i) Series supports two frame periods: 2.5 ms and 5 ms.
The 5ms frame period configuration provides higher throughput as a result of reduced frame
overhead during transmission. In turn, the 2.5 ms frame period configuration affords reduced
latency in the system, half of that introduced by the 5 ms frame configuration.
Page 1-13
Chapter 1: Product description
Wireless operation
Frame configuration - Downlink Data
The percentage of frame assigned to transport downlink data. The downlink data specifies the
percentage of the aggregate throughput for the downlink (frames transmitted from the AP/BHM to
the subscriber). The configurable range is 15 to 85 percent.
Link operation – Dynamic Rate Adapt
PMP/PTP 450(i) Series products offer eight levels or speeds of operation – 2X MIMO-B and 1X
MIMO-A (QPSK), 4X MIMO-B and 2X MIMO-A (16-QAM), 6x MIMO-B and 3X MIMO-A (64-QAM)
and 8X MIMO-B and 4X MIMO-A (265-QAM). If received power is less due to distance between the
AP/BHM and the SM/BHS or due to obstructions, or if interference affects the RF environment, the
system automatically and dynamically adjusts the links to the best operation level.
The system chooses its modulation rate dynamically, based on an internal ARQ (Automatic Repeat
reQuest) error control method. With ARQ, every data slot of every frame sent over the air (except
downlink broadcast) is expected to be acknowledged by the receiver, and if acknowledgement is
not received, the data is resent. The sending unit monitors these re-sends and adjusts the
modulation rate accordingly. It is normal to have links that change levels of operation as the RF
environment changes. Furthermore, the uplink or downlink portions of TDD duty cycle operate
independently; normal operation can have a downlink running at 6x while the uplink RF
environment only supports 2x.
The various modulation levels used by the PMP/PTP 450(i) are shown in Table 7.
Table 7 Modulation levels
Rate
M IMO-B
M IM O-A
QPSK
2X MIMO-B
1X MIMO-A
16-QAM
4X MIMO-B
2X MIMO-A
64-QAM
6X MIMO-B
3X MIMO-A
256-QAM
8X MIMO-B
4X MIMO-A
Note
MIMO-A achieves half the throughput of MIMO-B but adds a combining diversity (gain)
which enhances the link budget or availability.
Page 1-14
Chapter 1: Product description
Wireless operation
MIMO
Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) techniques provide protection against fading and increase
the probability that the receiver decodes a usable signal. When the effects of MIMO are combined
with those of OFDM techniques and a high link budget, there is a high probability of a robust
connection over a non-line-of-sight path.
The sub-features that comprises the MIMO techniques utilized in the PMP/PTP 450(i) product are:
•
Matrix A: This technique enables the PMP/PTP 450(i) radio to use a scheme that optimizes
coverage by transmitting the same data over both antennas. This redundancy improves the
signal to noise ratio at the receiver making it more robust, at the cost of throughput.
•
Matrix B: This technique provides for the ability to double the throughput of a radio
transmission under proper RF conditions. Different data streams are transmitted
simultaneously on two different antennas.
Encryption
The Cambium PMP/PTP 450(i) Series supports optional encryption for data transmitted over the
wireless link. The PTP 450(i) Series supports the following forms of encryption for security of the
wireless link:
•
DES (Data Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses secret
56-bit keys and 8 parity bits. DES performs a series of bit permutations, substitutions, and
recombination operations on blocks of data. DES encryption does not affect the performance
or throughput of the system.
•
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses
the Rijndael algorithm and 128-bit keys and 256-bit key size to establish a higher level of
security than DES. AES products are certified as compliant with the Federal Information
Processing Standards (FIPS 197) in the U.S.A.
Page 1-15
Chapter 1: Product description
System management
System management
This section introduces the PMP/PTP 450(i) management system, including the web interface,
installation, configuration, alerts and upgrades.
Management agent
PMP/PTP 450(i) Series equipment is managed through an embedded management agent.
Management workstations, network management systems or PCs can be connected to this agent
using the module’s Ethernet port or over-the air (SM/BHS)
The management agent supports the following interfaces:
•
Hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP)
•
Hypertext transfer protocol secure (HTTPS)
•
RADIUS authentication
•
Simple network management protocol (SNMP) – v2c and v3
•
Network time protocol (NTP)
•
System logging (Syslog)
•
Wireless Manager (WM) software
•
Canopy Network Updater Tool (CNUT) software
Web server
The PMP/PTP 450(i) management agent contains a web server. The web server supports access via
the HTTP/HTTPS interface.
Web-based management offers a convenient way to manage the PMP/PTP 450(i) equipment from a
locally connected computer or from a network management workstation connected through a
management network, without requiring any special management software. The web and SNMP
are the interfaces supported for installation of PMP/PTP 450(i) and for the majority of PMP/PTP
450(i) configuration management tasks.
Page 1-16
Chapter 1: Product description
System management
Web pages
The web-based management interfaces provide comprehensive web-based fault, configuration,
performance and security management functions organized into the following groups:
Access Point or Backhaul Master:
•
Home
•
Configuration
•
Statistics
•
Tools
•
Logs
•
Accounts
•
Quick Start
•
Copyright
Subscriber Module or Backhaul Slave
•
Home
•
Configuration
•
Statistics
•
Tools
•
Logs
•
Accounts
•
PDA
•
Copyright
Identity-based user accounts
•
When identity-based user accounts are configured, a security officer can define from one to
four user accounts, each of which may have one of the four possible roles:
•
ADMINISTRATOR, who has full read and write permissions. This is the level of the root and
admin users, as well as any other administrator accounts that one of them creates.
•
INSTALLER, who has permissions identical to those of ADMINISTRATOR except that the
installer cannot add or delete users or change the password of any other user.
•
TECHNICIAN, who has permissions to modify basic radio parameters and view informational
web pages
•
GUEST, who has no write permissions and only a limited view of General Status tab
•
Admin, Installer and Tech accounts can be configured as READ-ONLY. This will allow the
account to only see the items.
See Managing module access by passwords for detailed information on account permissions.
Page 1-17
Chapter 1: Product description
System management
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)
The PMP 450(i) system includes support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service)
protocol functionality including:
•
Authentication: Allows only known SMs onto the network (blocking “rogue” SMs), and can be
configured to ensure SMs are connecting to a known network (preventing SMs from
connecting to “rogue” APs). RADIUS authentication is used for SMs, but not used for APs.
•
SM Configuration: Configures authenticated SMs with MIR (Maximum Information Rate), High
Priority, and VLAN (Virtual LAN) parameters from the RADIUS server when a SM registers to
an AP.
•
SM Accounting provides support for RADIUS accounting messages for usage-based billing.
This accounting includes indications for subscriber session establishment, subscriber session
disconnection, and bandwidth usage per session for each SM that connects to the AP.
•
Centralized AP and SM user name and password management: Allows AP and SM usernames
and access levels (Administrator, Installer, Technician and Read-Only) to be centrally
administered in the RADIUS server instead of on each radio and tracks access events
(logon/logoff) for each username on the RADIUS server. This accounting does not track and
report specific configuration actions performed on radios or pull statistics such as bit counts
from the radios. Such functions require an Element Management System (EMS) such as
Cambium Wireless Manager. This accounting is not the ability to perform accounting functions
on the subscriber/end user/customer account.
•
Framed-IP-Address: Operators may use a RADIUS server to assign management IP addressing
to SM modules.
SNMP
The management agent supports fault and performance management by means of an SNMP
interface. The management agent is compatible with SNMP v2c and SNMP v3 using Management
Information Base (MIB) files which are available for download from the Cambium Networks
Support website:
https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/ptp450
https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/pmp450
Network Time Protocol (NTP)
The clock supplies accurate date and time information to the system. It can be set to run with or
without a connection to a network time server (NTP). It can be configured to display local time by
setting the time zone and daylight saving in the Time web page.
If an NTP server connection is available, the clock can be set to synchronize with the server time at
regular intervals. PMP/PTP 450(i) devices may receive NTP data from a CMM4 module or an NTP
server configured in the system’s management network.
Page 1-18
Chapter 1: Product description
System management
The Time Zone option is configurable on the AP’s/BHM’s Time Configuration page, and may be
used to offset the received NTP time to match the operator’s local time zone. When set on the
AP/BHM, the offset is set for the entire sector (AP/BHSs is notified of the current Time Zone upon
initial registration). If a Time Zone change is applied, the AP/BHSs are notified of the change in a
best effort fashion, meaning some AP/BHSs may not pick up the change until the next reregistration. Time Zone changes are noted in the Event Log.
An AP/BHM which is receiving NTP date and time information from an NTP server or from a GPS
synchronization source may be used as an NTP server. Any client which has IP connectivity to the
BHM may request NTP date and time information from the AP/BHM. No additional configuration
(other than the AP/BHM receiving valid NTP data) is required to use the AP/BHM as an NTP server.
Wireless Manager (WM)
Cambium Networks Wireless Manager 4.0 is recommended for managing PMP/PTP 450(i)
networks. You can achieve better uptime through better visibility of your network with the
Cambium Wireless Manager. This network management software tool offers breakthrough mapbased visualization capabilities using embedded Google maps, and combined with advanced
configuration, provisioning, alerting and reporting features you can control your entire outdoor
wireless network including Point-to-Multipoint and Point-to-Point solutions as well as other SNMP
enabled devices. With its powerful user interface you can not only be able to control your
network's access, distribution and backhaul layers, but can also have visibility to WLAN sites and
be able to quickly launch indoor network management systems. Some key features of Wireless
Manager are:
•
Template-Based Configuration: With Wireless Manager's user-defined templates you can
accelerate the process for the configuration of the devices you add to your network resulting in
quicker and easier deployments. The template-based functionality provides an automated way
to configure large numbers of network devices with just a few mouse clicks, and can be
scheduled to occur at any time via Wireless Manager's Task Scheduler.
•
Ultralight Thin Client: With the growing mobile workforce it is important to have access to
the status of your network at any time. With Wireless Manager you can view the status and
performance of your entire wireless network via a compact web interface accessible by your
smart phone.
•
Map-Based Visualization: Wireless Manager overlays sophisticated real-time information
about your network elements onto building layouts and dynamic Google maps. Visuals can be
scaled to view an entire city or building or a specific area, floor or link.
•
High Availability Architecture Support: Wireless Manager offers a high availability
option, providing a highly reliable and redundant network management solution that ensures
you always have management access to your network.
•
High Scalability: The enhanced Wireless Manager offers you server scalability with support
for up to 10,000 nodes as well as support for distributed server architecture.
Cambium’s Wireless Manager 4.0 available for download at:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/management-tools/wireless-manager/
Page 1-19
Chapter 1: Product description
System management
Canopy Network Updater Tool (CNUT)
CNUT (Canopy Network Updater Tool) is the stand-alone software update tool for PMP/PTP 450(i)
Series products. The CNUT 4.9.12 or greater should be used for 450(i) radios.
The Canopy Network Updater Tool has the following features:
•
Automatically discovers all network elements
•
HTTP and HTTPS
•
Executes UDP command that initiates and terminates the Auto-update mode within APs/BHMs.
This command is both secure and convenient:
•
•
For security, the AP/BHM accepts this command from only the IP address that specified in
the Configuration page of ODU.
For convenience, Network Updater automatically sets this Configuration parameter in the
AP/BHM to the IP address of the Network Updater server when the server performs any of
the update commands.
Allows you to choose among updating:
Entire network.
Only elements that you select.
Only network branches that you select.
Provides a Script Engine that you can use with any script which:
The user can define.
Cambium supplies.
CNUT is available at:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/management-tools/cnut/
Radio recovery mode – Radio Recovery Console /
Default Mode (fka Default Plug)
PMP/PTP 450i
The PMP/PTP 450i recovery mode provides a means to recover from serious configuration errors
including lost or forgotten passwords and unknown IP addresses.
Recovery mode also allows new main application software to be loaded even when the integrity of
the existing main application software image has been compromised. The most likely cause of an
integrity problem with the installed main application software is where the power supply has been
interrupted during a software upgrade.
The recovery mode supports a single IPv4 interface, with IP address 169.254.1.1, and with default
link settings.
Note
When Recovery has been entered through a power on/off/on cycle, the ODU will revert
to normal operation if no web access has been made to the unit within 30 seconds.
Page 1-20
Chapter 1: Product description
System management
This prevents the unit remaining inadvertently in recovery following a power outage.
Recovery mode options
Options in recovery mode (IPv4 only) are as follows:
•
Load a previous SW image
•
Boot with default Canopy system software settings (similar to the hardware default plug on
previous Canopy-based PMP platforms)
The last most recent software image loaded to the board is retained. The factory image is not
retained.
Boot with default Canopy system software settings (similar to the hardware default plug on
previous Canopy-based PMP platforms).
See Error! Reference source not found. on page Error! Bookmark not defined..
PMP/PTP 450
A default plug (sometimes called an override plug) is available to provide access to a module
whose password and/or IP address have been forgotten. This plug allows the PMP 450 AP, PMP
450 SM, or PTP 450 BH to be accessed using IP address 169.254.1.1 and no password. During the
override session, you can assign any new IP address and set either or both user passwords
(display-only and/or full access) as well as make other parameter changes.
This plug is available from Best-Tronics Manufacturing, Inc.
See http://www.best-tronics.com/cambium.htm as Part BT-0583 (RJ-11 Default Plug). Alternatively,
you can fabricate an override plug. For pinout see Override plug cable on page 5-14.
Page 1-21
Chapter 2:
System hardware
This chapter describes the hardware components of a PMP/PTP 450(i) link.
The following topics are described in this chapter:
•
System Components on page 2-2 describes system components of PTP and PMP including its
accessories.
•
Cabling and lightning protection on page 2-26 describes various cable and lightning protection.
•
Antennas and antenna cabling on page 2-34 describes supported antennas and its accessories.
•
GPS synchronization on page 2-37 describes UGPS and CMM4.
Page 2-1
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
System Components
Point-to-Multipoint (PMP)
The PMP radio is a transceiver device. It is a connectorized or radiated outdoor unit containing all
the radio, networking, and surge suppression electronics. It can be purchased as:
•
Access Point Module (AP)
•
Subscriber Module (SM)
PMP 450(i) - Integrated or Connectorized ODU
The PMP 450i and PMP 450 ODUs are supplied in Integrated or Connectorized configurations.
See Table 2 PMP/PTP 450i Series hardware configurations on page 1-4
See Table 4 PMP/PTP 450 Series hardware configurations on page 1-7
Page 2-2
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Product variants
Table 8 PMP 450i variants
Variant
900
13
MHz
PMP 450i
AP
Region
FCC
Antenna
Connectorized
Frequency
Range
902 - 928
MHz
Channel
Bandwidt
5, 7, 10, 20
MHz
M ax
Tx
Power
25 dBm
Notes
Transmit power
limited based
on regional
setting
Connectorized
FCC
5 GHz
PMP 450i
AP
RoW
Canada
RoW DES
FCC
5 GHz
PMP 450i
SM
RoW
Canada
RoW DES
13
Integrated 16 dBi
90 degree
Connectorized
Integrated 23 dBi
Connectorized
4900 – 5925
MHz
5, 10, 20
MHz
27 dBm
Transmit power
limited based
on regional
setting
Integrated 23 dBi
Connectorized
Integrated 23 dBi
Connectorized
Integrated 23 dBi
Connectorized
Integrated 23 dBi
Connectorized
4900 – 5925
MHz
Integrated 23 dBi
Connectorized
Integrated 23 dBi
900 MHz support planned for future release.
Page 2-3
5, 10, 20
MHz
27 dBm
Transmit power
limited based
on regional
setting
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Table 9 PMP 450 variants
Variant
2.4 GHz
PMP 450
AP
3.5 GHz
PMP 450
AP
3.65 GHz
PMP 450
AP
Region
FCC ISM
Channel
Bandwidt
M ax
Tx
Power
Integrated 18 dBi
2400 –
2483.5 MHz
5, 10, 20
MHz
3300 – 3600
MHz
5, 7, 10, 20
MHz
FCC ISM
Integrated 16 dBi
27 dBm
27 dBm
Transmit power
limited based
on regional
setting
27 dBm
Transmit power
limited based
on regional
setting
Connectorized
FCC ISM
RoW
Canada
FCC
Integrated 16 dBi
3550 – 3800
MHz
5, 7, 10, 20
MHz
5470 – 5875
MHz
10, 20 MHz
(5 MHz not
available
in DFS
regions(
Notes
Transmit power
limited based
on regional
setting
Connectorized
RoW DES
900 MHz
PMP 450i
14
SM
Frequency
Range
Connectorized
FCC
5.4/5.8
GHz
PMP 450
AP
Antenna
Connectorized
Integrated 17 dBi
Connectorized
Integrated 17 dBi
Connectorized
Integrated 17 dBi
27 dBm
Transmit power
limited based
on regional
setting
Connectorized
Integrated 23 dBi
Connectorized
902 - 928
MHz
5, 7, 10, 20
MHz
25 dBm
Transmit power
limited based
on regional
setting
Note
Not all variants may be available at the same time in some or all regions. Please
contact your sales representative for details on availability.
14
900 MHz support planned for future release.
Page 2-4
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Backhaul (PTP)
The Backhaul radio is a transceiver device. It is a connectorized or integrated outdoor unit
containing all the radio, networking, and surge suppression electronics. It can be configured as:
•
Backhaul Master (BHM)
•
Backhaul Slave (BHS)
PTP 450(i) - Integrated or Connectorized ODU
See Table 2 PMP/PTP 450i Series hardware configurations on page 1-4
See Table 4 PMP/PTP 450 Series hardware configurations on page 1-7
Product variants
Table 10 PTP 450i variants
Variant
Region
FCC
RoW
5 GHz
PTP 450i
Canada
RoW
DES
Antenna
Frequency
Range
Channe
Bandwi
dth
M ax
Tx
Power
Notes
Connectorized
Integrated 23 dBi
Connectorized
Integrated 23 dBi
Connectorized
4900 – 5925
MHz
Integrated 23 dBi
Connectorized
Integrated 23 dBi
Page 2-5
5, 10, 20
MHz
27 dBm
Transmit power
limited based
on regional
setting
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Table 11 PTP 450 variants
Variant
3.5 GHz
PTP 450
BH
3.65 GHz
PTP 450
BH
5.4/5.8
GHZ PTP
450 BH
Region
Frequency
Range
Channe
Bandwi
dth
3300 – 3600
MHz
5, 7, 10,
20 MHz
M ax
Tx
Power
Connectorized
ROW
Integrated 16 dBi
ROW
Integrated 16 dBi
3550 – 3800
MHz
5, 7, 10,
20 MHz
5470 – 5875
MHz
5, 7, 10,
20 MHz
27 dBm
27 dBm
Transmit power
limited based
on regional
setting
27 dBm
Transmit power
limited based
on regional
setting
Connectorized
FCC
RoW
Canada
RoW
DES
Integrated 17 dBi
Notes
Transmit power
limited based
on regional
setting
Connectorized
FCC
5 GHz
PTP 450
BH
Antenna
Connectorized
Integrated 23 dBi
Connectorized
Integrated 23 dBi
Connectorized
4900 – 5925
MHz
5, 10, 20
MHz
27 dBm
Transmit power
limited based
on regional
setting
Integrated 23 dBi
Connectorized
Integrated 23 dBi
Note
Not all variants may be available at the same time in some or all regions. Please
contact your sales representative for details on availability.
Page 2-6
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
PMP/PTP 450(i) interfaces
PMP/PTP 450i interfaces – AP/SM/BH
The AP/SM/BH interfaces are illustrated below.
Figure 5 PMP/PTP 450i interfaces
Table 12 AP/SM/BH interface descriptions and cabling
Interface
Function
PSU/Ethernet
Power-over-Ethernet, Ethernet
communications (management and data),
CMM sync-over-power synchronization
input
Aux/Sync
Cabling
GPS synchronization input and output,
UGPS power output
Audio tones
RJ45 Cable
See Table 63 on page 5-11
RJ 45 Cable
See Table 64 on page 5-11
Data
RF Port A
Vertical RF connection to antenna
50 ohm RF cable, N-type
RF Port B
Horizontal RF connection to antenna
50 ohm RF cable, N-type
Ground Lugs
For grounding the unit
10 AWG copper wire
Page 2-7
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
PMP/PTP 450 interfaces - AP
The PMP 450 AP interfaces are illustrated below.
Figure 5 PMP/PTP 450 interfaces - AP
Path A RF Port
Sync/Default
Ethernet
Path B RF port
Table 13 AP interface descriptions and cabling – 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz
Interface
Function
Cabling
PSU/Ethernet
Power-over-Ethernet, Ethernet
communications (management and
data)
RJ45 Cable
GPS synchronization signaling,
provides power to UGPS module.
Default plug port.
RJ11 cable, default
plug.
Sync/Default
2.4 GHz
-45 degree RF connection to AP
antenna
5 GHz
Vertical RF connection to AP antenna
2.4 GHz
+45 degree RF connection to AP
antenna
RF Port A
RF Port B
Ground Lugs
5 GHz
Horizontal RF connection to AP
antenna
For grounding the unit
Page 2-8
50 ohm RF cable,
N-type
50 ohm RF cable,
N-type
10 AWG copper
wire
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
PMP/PTP 450 interfaces – SM/BH
The PMP 450 SM/BH interfaces are illustrated below.
Figure 5 PMP/PTP 450 interfaces – SM/BH
Ethernet
Sync/Defaul
Figure 5 PMP/PTP 450 interfaces – SM/BH Connectorized
Page 2-9
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Figure 5 PMP 450d SM - Integrated Dish
Figure 5 PTP 450 Series – BHM/BHS
Page 2-10
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Diagnostic LEDs
The diagnostic LEDs of PMP 450(i) Series are as shown in Figure 3.
Figure 3 Radio diagnostic LEDs, viewed from unit front
ODU LED Display
LED Labels
LNK/5
ACT/4
GPS/3
SES/2
SYN/1
PWR
Note
The LED color helps distinguish the position of LED. The LED color does not indicate
any status.
AP/BHM LEDs
The diagnostic LEDs report the information about the status of the BHM/AP.
Page 2-11
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Table 14 AP/BHM LED descriptions
LED
Color when
active
Status
inform ation
provided
PWR
Red
DC power
Always lit after 10-20 seconds of power
on.
SYN/1
Yellow
Presence of sync
SES/2
Green
Unused
Red
Pulse of sync
Lit when the AP/BHM is getting a sync
pulse from a GPS source goes along
with SYN/1
Yellow
Presence of data
activity on the
Ethernet link
Flashes during data transfer. Frequency
of flash is not a diagnostic indication.
GPS/3
ACT/4
For PMP/PTP
450i
LNK/5
Red/ Green/Orange
(bi-colored for
10/100/1000)
For PMP/PTP
450
Notes
Continuously lit when link is present.
Ethernet link
10Base-T : Red
Ethernet link
100Base-T : Green
1000Base-T : Orange
Continuously lit when link is present.
Green
Note
The LED color helps you distinguish position of the LED. The LED color does not
indicate any status.
SM/BHS LEDs
The SM/BHS LEDs provide different status of radio based on the operating modes. A SM/BHS in
“operating” mode registers and passes traffic normally. A SM/BHS in “aiming” mode does not
register or pass the traffic, but displays (via LED panel) the strength of received radio signals
(based on radio channel selected via Tools -> Alignm ent).
Page 2-12
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Table 15 SM/BHS LED descriptions
Status inform ation provided
LED
Color when
active
SM / BHS in
“Operating”
SM / BHS in
“Aiming” Mode
Notes
M ode
PWR
Red
DC power
Always lit after 10-20
seconds of power on.
SYN/1
Yellow
Presence of sync
Lit when SM/BHS is in sync
with an AP/BHM.
SES/2
Green
Session Indicator
Lit when SM/BHS is in
session.
Unused
On - high interference.
Blinking - medium
interference.
Off - low interference.
GPS/3
ACT/4
Red
Yellow
Presence of data
activity
on the Ethernet link
For
PMP/PTP
450i
Red/ Green/
Orange
LNK/5
Ethernet link
These five LEDs
act as a bar graph
to indicate the
relative quality of
alignment. As
power level
improves during
alignment, more
of these LEDs are
lit.
(bi-colored for
10/100/1000)
For
PMP/PTP
450
Flashes during data transfer.
Frequency of flash is not a
diagnostic indication.
Continuously lit when link is
present.
10Base-T : Red
100Base-T : Green
1000Base-T : Orange
Continuously lit when link is
present.
Ethernet link
Green
Operating Mode
•
Scanning: If the SM/BHS is not registered to AP/BHM, then these three LEDs cycle on and off
from left to right (SYN/1, SES/2 and GPS/3).
•
Ethernet Link: The LNK/5 LED lit continuously when link is present.
•
Data Transfer: The ACT/4 LED lit on the presence of data activity on the Ethernet link.
Page 2-13
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Aiming Mode
The 5 LEDs (SYN/1, SES/2, GPS/3, ACT/4 and LNK/5) are turned into a 5-position bar graph. The
more LEDs that are lit, the better the received power the module is seeing. The colors of the LEDS
have no particular meaning other than to assist is distinguishing one position from the next.
ODU part numbers
Order PMP/PTP 450i and PMP/PTP 450 Series products from Cambium Networks.
PMP 450i
Table 16 PMP 450i ODU part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part
number
PMP 450i AP (Access Point)
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point (RoW)
C050045A001A
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point (FCC)
C050045A002A
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point (EU)
C050045A003A
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point (DES Only)
C050045A004A
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point (IC)
C050045A015A
5 GHz PMP 450i AP, Integrated 90°sector antenna (RoW)
C050045A005A
5 GHz PMP 450i AP, Integrated 90°sector antenna (FCC)
C050045A006A
5 GHz PMP 450i Integrated Access Point, 90 degree (EU)
C050045A007A
5 GHz PMP 450i AP, Integrated 90°sector antenna (DES only)
C050045A008A
5 GHz PMP 450i AP, Integrated 90°sector antenna (IC)
C050045A016A
900 MHz
15
PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point
C009045A001A
PMP 450i SM (Subscriber M odule)
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Subscriber Module
C050045C001A
5 GHz PMP 450i SM, Integrated High Gain Antenna
C050045C002A
900 MHz PMP 450i Connectorized Subscriber Module
C009045C001A
15
900 MHz support planned for future release.
Page 2-14
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
PTP 450i
Table 17 PTP 450i ODU part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part
number
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (RoW)
C050045B001A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (RoW)
C050045B002A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (FCC)
C050045B003A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (EU)
C050045B005A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (DES only)
C050045B007A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (IC)
C050045B015A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (FCC)
C050045B004A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (EU)
C050045B006A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (DES only)
C050045B008A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (IC)
C050045B016A
Ethernet cable adapter for CMM4
N000045L001A
PMP 450
Table 18 PMP 450 ODU part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part
number
PMP 450 AP (Access Point)
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point
C024045A001A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point (DES)
C024045A003A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point
C035045A001A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point (DES)
C035045A003A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point
C036045A001A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point (DES)
C036045A003A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point
C054045A001A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point (US only)
C054045A002A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point (DES)
C054045A003A
PMP 450 AP Lite
Page 2-15
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Cambium description
Cambium part
number
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point - Lite
C024045A011A
3.3-3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point - Lite
C035045A011A
3.55-3.8 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point - Lite
C036045A011A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point - Lite
C054045A011A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point (FCC) - Lite
C054045A012A
PMP 450 SM (Subscriber M odule)
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C024045C001A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C024045C002A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C024045C003A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C024045C004A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C024045C005A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C024045C006A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C024045C007A
2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C024045C008A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C035045C001A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C035045C002A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C035045C003A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C035045C004A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C035045C005A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C035045C006A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C035045C007A
3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C035045C008A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C036045C001A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C036045C002A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C036045C003A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C036045C004A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C036045C005A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C036045C006A
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C036045C007A
Page 2-16
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Cambium description
Cambium part
number
3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C036045C008A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C054045C005A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C054045C006A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C054045C007A
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C054045C008A
5 GHz PMP 450 Integrated Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C054045C001B
5 GHz PMP 450 Integrated Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C054045C002B
5 GHz PMP 450 Integrated Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C054045C003B
5 GHz PMP 450 Integrated Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C054045C004B
5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps
C054045C005B
6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps
C054045C006B
7 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps
C054045C007B
8 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, Uncapped
C054045C008B
5 GHz PMP 450d Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps – PMP 450d Radio
Only
C054045C013B
5 GHz PMP 450d Subscriber Module, Uncapped – PMP 450d Radio
Only
C054045C014B
5 GHz PMP 450d Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps – PMP 450d
C054045H013B
5 GHz PMP 450d Subscriber Module, Uncapped – PMP 450d
C054045H014B
PTP 450
Table 19 PTP 450 ODU part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part
number
3.5 GHz PTP 450 BH Unit
C035045A001A
3.5 GHz PTP 450 BH Unit, DES only
C035045A003A
PTP 450 3.5 GHz END – Integrated
C035045B001A
PTP 450 3.5 GHz END – Connectorized
C035045B002A
PTP 450 3.5 GHz END – Integrated – DES Only
C035045B003A
PTP 450 3.5 GHz END – Connectorized – DES Only
C035045B004A
Page 2-17
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Cambium description
Cambium part
number
3.6 GHz PTP 450 BH Unit
C036045A001A
3.6 GHz PTP 450 BH Unit, DES only
C036045A003A
PTP 450 3.65 GHz END – Integrated
C036045B001A
PTP 450 3.65 GHz END – Connectorized
C036045B002A
PTP 450 3.65 GHz END – Integrated – DES Only
C036045B003A
PTP 450 3.65 GHz END – Connectorized – DES Only
C036045B004A
5 GHz PTP 450 BH Unit
C054045A001A
5 GHz PTP 450 BH Unit, US only
C054045A002A
5 GHz PTP 450 BH Unit, DES only
C054045A003A
PTP 450 5 GHz END – Integrated (ROW)
C054045B001A
PTP 450 5 GHz END – Connectorized (ROW)
C054045B002A
PTP 450 5 GHz END – Integrated (ROW) – DES Only
C054045B003A
PTP 450 5 GHz END – Connectorized (ROW) – DES Only
C054045B004A
PTP 450 5 GHz END – Integrated (FCC)
C054045B005A
PTP 450 5 GHz END – Connectorized (FCC)
C054045B006A
PMP/PTP 450 Accessories
Cambium description
Cambium part
number
PMP 450 AP Antenna Options
5 GHz Antenna for 90 Degree Sector
85009324001
5 GHz Antenna for 60 Degree Sector
85009325001
2.4 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 60 Degree Sector
C024045D601A
3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 90 Degree Sector
C030045D901A
N-type to N-type cable (16 inch length)
30009406002
AP Optional Equipm ent
Gigabit Enet Capable Power Supply - 30VDC, 15W
N000900L001A
Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, US
N000900L007A
Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, EU
N000900L008A
Page 2-18
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Cambium description
Cambium part
number
Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, UK
N000900L009A
Power Supply,120W 30VDC AT 60C 100-240VAC EL5
ACPS120WA
Surge Protector
600SSH
Universal Mounting Bracket
SMMB2A
CMM MICRO (Outdoor Enclosure)
1070CKHH
CMM4 W/RUGGEDIZED Switch and GPS
1090CKHH
CMM4 NO Switch
1091HH
CMM4 Rack Mount Assembly
1092HH
Universal GPS Module
1096H
SM Optional Equipment
Gigabit Enet Capable Power Supply - 30VDC, 15W
N000900L001A
Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, US
N000900L007A
Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, EU
N000900L008A
Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, UK
N000900L009A
53CM Offset, Reflector Dish Kit, 4PK
HK2022A
Universal Mounting Kit
SMMB1A
Surge Protector
600SSH
Upgrade Keys
PMP 450 4 To 10 Mbps Upgrade Key
C000045K002A
PMP 450 4 To 20 Mbps Upgrade Key
C000045K003A
PMP 450 4 To Uncapped Upgrade Key
C000045K004A
PMP 450 10 To 20 Mbps Upgrade Key
C000045K005A
PMP 450 10 To Uncapped MBPS Upgrade Key
C000045K006A
PMP 450 20 To Uncapped MBPS Upgrade Key
C000045K007A
PMP 450 Lite AP to Full AP Upgrade Key
C000045K008A
Extended W arranty
PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 1 Additional Year
SG00TS4009A
PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 2 Additional Years
SG00TS4017A
PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 4 Additional Years
SG00TS4025A
Page 2-19
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Cambium description
Cambium part
number
PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 1 Additional Year
SG00TS4010A
PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 2 Additional Years
SG00TS4018A
PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 4 Additional Years
SG00TS4026A
Power supply options
The PMP/PTP 450(i) is powered over its Main Ethernet cable using Power Over Ethernet (POE). The
power injector is connected to the ODU and network terminating equipment using Cat5e cable
with RJ45 connectors.
Power supply – PMP/PTP 450i
The PMP/PTP 450i support powering from the following powering sources:
•
Power Suppy, 60 W, 56 V with Gbps support
•
AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector
•
Power over Ethernet midspan, 60 W, -48 VDC Input
•
CMM4 with external 56 V power supply
•
IEEE802.3at power injector
Please refer to Ethernet standards and cable lengths on Page 2-27 for details on maximum cable
lengths between power injector and PMP/PTP 450i.
PSU part numbers
Table 20 PSU part numbers for PMP/PTP 450i
Cambium description
Cambium part
number
Power supply, 60 W, 56 V with Gbps support
N000065L001B
AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector
C000065L002A
Power over Ethernet midspan, 60 W, -48 VDC Input
N000000L036A
AC Power Injector
The AC Power Injector interfaces are shown in Figure 4 and described in Table 21.
Page 2-20
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Figure 4 AC Power Injector interfaces
Table 21 AC Power Injector interface functions
Interface
Function
AC power in
AC power input (main supply)
ODU
RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to ODU
LAN
RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to network
Power (green) LED
Power supply detection
AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector
The AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector interfaces are shown in Figure 5 and described in Table 22.
Page 2-21
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Figure 5 AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector interfaces
Table 22 AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector interface functions
Interface
Function
100-240V 47-63Hz 1.5A
AC power input (main supply)
DC In
Alternative DC power supply input
DC Out
DC power output to a second PSU (for power supply redundancy) or
to a NIDU
ODU
RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to ODU
LAN
RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to network
Power (green) LED
Power supply detection
Ethernet (yellow) LED
Ethernet traffic detection
-48 V DC Power Injector
The DC Power Injector interfaces are shown in Figure 6 and described in Table 23.
Page 2-22
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Figure 6 -48 V DC Power Injector interfaces
Table 23 -48V DC Power Injector interfaces
Interface
Function
DC input
36 to 60V, 2A
RJ 45 Sockets
Two (Data In and Data & Power Out)
LEDs
Two (AC and Port)
Power supply – PMP/PTP 450
The PMP/PTP 450 support powering from the following powering sources:
•
Gigabit Enet Capable Power Supply - 30VDC, 15W
•
Power Supply,120W 30VDC AT 60C 100-240VAC EL5
PSU part numbers
Table 24 PSU part numbers for PMP/PTP 450
Cambium description
Cambium part
number
Gigabit Enet Capable Power Supply - 30VDC, 15W
N000900L001A
Power Supply,120W 30VDC AT 60C 100-240VAC EL5
ACPS120WA
Gigabit Enet Capable Power Supply
The Gigabit Enet Capable power supply interfaces are described in Table 25.
Table 25 –Gigabit Enet Capable power supply
Interface
Function
Page 2-23
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
AC Input
90-264 VAC, 0.5A rms @120VAC/ 0.25A rms @240VAC, 47 to 63 Hz
DC Output
30.0 Vdc +/-5%, 15W, 500 mA max
RJ 45 Sockets
Two (Data In and Data & Power Out)
LEDs
Green, :LED Intensity determined by Level 5 efficiency
Power Supply -120 W/30 VDC
The power supply 120W/30VDC interfaces are described in Table 26.
Table 26 -120 W/30 VDC power supply
Interface
Function
AC Input
90-264 VAC, 3A rms @115VAC/ 1.5A rms @230VAC, 47 to 63 Hz
DC Output
30.0 Vdc +/-5%, 120W, 4 A max
RJ 45 Sockets
Two (Data In and Data & Power Out)
ODU mounting brackets & accessories
The list of supported brackets is provided in Table 27.
•
The "Tilt bracket assembly" is the recommended bracket for the AP, SM or BH integrated units.
•
The "Mounting Bracket (Connectorized)" can be used where a low profile and ease of assembly
of Connectorized AP, SM or BH is required.
•
The "Mounting Bracket (Integrated)" provide a wider range of adjustment for AP, SM and BH
integrated devices.
Table 27 Accessories part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part
number
Mounting brackets
Tilt Bracket Assembly
N000045L002A
Mounting Bracket (Integrated)
N000065L031A
Mounting Bracket (Connectorized)
N000065L032A
Miscellaneous
Ethernet cable adapter for CMM4
N000045L001A
Page 2-24
Chapter 2: System hardware
System Components
Lightning protection
The PMP/PTP 450i Series supports the lightning protection units listed in Table 28.
The LPU offers the highest level of protection and is the recommended device. Where low cost
deployment is essential, for example for SM in residential application, the Gigabit Surge
Suppressor may be used instead.
Table 28 Lightning protection part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part
number
LPU and Grounding Kit (1 kit per ODU)
C000065L007A
Gigabit Surge Suppressor (56V)
C000000L033A
Page 2-25
Chapter 2: System hardware
Cabling and lightning protection
Cabling and lightning protection
ODU interfaces – PMP/PTP 450i
The Ethernet and Sync/AUX ports are on the rear of the integrated and connectorized ODUs
(Figure 7). These interfaces are described in Table 29.
Figure 7 ODU rear interfaces
Table 29 ODU rear interfaces
Port name
Connector
Interface
Description
Main PSU
RJ45
PoE input
Power over Ethernet (PoE).
10/100/1000BASE-T
Ethernet
Data
10/100/100BASE-T Ethernet
Data (see Note below)
PoE output
Standard IEEE802.3at PoE. (see
Note below)
Sync input/output
Connection and powering of UGPS
Sync/AUX
RJ45
Sync input
Page 2-26
Chapter 2: System hardware
Cabling and lightning protection
Note
The Sync/AUX port Data and PoE output capability are not supported in this firmware
release 14.0.
The front of the connectorized ODU (Figure 8 Connectorized ODU antenna interfaces) provides N
type female connectors for RF cable interfaces to antennas with ports A and B for vertical and
horizontal polarization respectively.
Figure 8 Connectorized ODU antenna interfaces
Ethernet standards and cable lengths
All configurations require a copper Ethernet connection from the ODU (Ethernet port) to the PoE.
Table 30 specifies, for each type of PSU and configuration, the maximum permitted PSU drop
cable length.
Page 2-27
Chapter 2: System hardware
Cabling and lightning protection
Table 30 PSU drop cable length restrictions
System configuration
M axim um cable length (m /ft)
Power supply
PoE powered
device on
AUX/SYNC port
(see Note below)
From power
supply to ODU
From ODU to PoE
device on AUX/SYNC
port (see Note
below)
AC Power Injector (60W)
None
100 m
N/A
IEEE 802.3at Type 2
AC+DC enhanced Power
Injector (90W)
None
100 m in total
100 m
IEEE 802.3at Type 2
-48 V DC power injector
None
100 m in total
100 m
IEEE 802.3at Type 2
CMM4 with 56 V supply
None
100 m
None
N/A
100 m in total
IEEE 802.3at Type 2
IEEE802.3at compliant
supply
N/A
N/A
Not supported
100 m
IEEE 802.3at Type 2
N/A
Not supported
Note
The Ethernet functionality and associated PoE output capability are not supported in
this firmware release.
The Ethernet connectivity for CMM4 requires the part “Ethernet cable adapter for
CMM4 – N000045L001A”.
Page 2-28
Chapter 2: System hardware
Cabling and lightning protection
Outdoor copper Cat5e Ethernet cable
Outdoor Cat5e cable is used for all connections that terminate outside the building. For example,
connections between the ODU, surge suppressors (if installed), UGPS receivers (if installed) and
the power supply injector. This is known as a “drop cable” (Figure 9).
The following practices are essential to the reliability and longevity of cabled connections:
•
Use only shielded cables and connectors to resist interference and corrosion.
•
For vertical runs, provide cable support and strain relief.
•
Include a 2 ft (0.6 m) service loop on each end of the cable to allow for thermal expansion and
contraction and to facilitate terminating the cable again when needed.
•
Include a drip loop to shed water so that most of the water does not reach the connector at the
device.
•
Properly crimp all connectors.
•
Use dielectric grease on all connectors to resist corrosion.
Order Superior Essex type BBDGe cable from Cambium Networks (Table 31). Other lengths of this
cable are available from Superior Essex.
Figure 9 Outdoor drop cable
Table 31 Drop cable part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
1000 ft Reel Outdoor Copper Clad CAT5E
WB3175
328 ft (100 m) Reel Outdoor Copper Clad CAT5E
WB3176
Page 2-29
Chapter 2: System hardware
Cabling and lightning protection
Main Ethernet port
The PoE cable pinout diagram for Main port is given below.
Table 32 Main port PoE cable pinout
RJ45
pin
Interface
Ethernet
description
+TxRx0
–TxRx0
+TxRx1
1000 BaseT
Ethernet with
PoE In
+Ve or -Ve
+Ve or –Ve
–TxRx1
–TxRx2
+TxRx2
+TxRx3
–TxRx3
PoE input
description
+Ve or –Ve
+Ve or –Ve
Note
The PoE input on the Main port accepts any polarity as long as there is at least one pair
at +Ve and at least one at –Ve.
Aux port
Table 33 Aux port PoE cable pinout
RJ45
pin
Interface
100 BaseT
Ethernet with
PoE Out (see
note below)
+TxRx0
PoE output
description
-Ve
–TxRx0
+TxRx1
+Ve
–TxRx1
GPS power out, Alignment
tone out, GPS data out
Signal description
GPS and
alignment tone
GPS data in
N/A
GPS 0v
GPS Sync in
Page 2-30
Chapter 2: System hardware
Cabling and lightning protection
Note
Only alignment and sync functionalities are supported on the Aux port in current
release 14.0.
Aux port to alignment tone headset wiring
A standard 32 ohms stereo headset can be connected to the AUX port to use the audio alignment
tool. The diagram of the adapter is provided in Figure 10. The recommended values for both
resistors are 220 ohm, 0.25W. Different resistor value can be used to optimize the level of the audio
signal depending on the headset characteristics and the level of ambient noise
Figure 10 Alignment Tone Cable
Resistors
#8
Pin 7
Left / tip
220 Ω
Right / ring
220 Ω
Pin 4
Sleeve /Common
Table 34 Aux port PoE cable pinout
RJ45 pin
(AUX port)
Signal description
Alignment tone out
GPS 0v
Serial component
Jack socket
(to jack plug of
headset)
220 ohms resistor
Ring
220 ohm resistor
Tip
None
Sleeve
Alternatively, a readymade headset adapter can be ordered from Best-Tronics
(http://btpa.com/Cambium-Products/) with the following part number:
Table 35 Alignment tone adapter third party product details
Reference
Product description
BT-1277
Headset alignment cable for the Cambium Networks PMP450i and
PTP450i product lines
Page 2-31
Chapter 2: System hardware
Cabling and lightning protection
Cable grounding kit
Copper drop cable shields must be bonded to the grounding system in order to prevent lightningstrike arcing (resulting in fire risk and damage to equipment).
One grounding kit (Figure 11) is required for each grounding point on the PSU. Order cable
grounding kits from Cambium Networks (Table 36).
Caution
To provide adequate protection, all grounding cables must be a minimum size of 10
mm2 csa (8AWG), preferably 16 mm2 csa (6AWG), or 25 mm2 csa (4AWG).
Figure 11 Cable grounding kit
Table 36 Cable grounding kit part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
Cable Grounding Kits For 1/4" And 3/8" Cable
01010419001
Lightning protection unit (LPU) and grounding kit
PMP/PTP 450i LPUs provide transient voltage surge suppression for ODU installations. Each PSU
requires two LPUs, one near the ODU and the other near the linked device, usually at the building
entry point (Table 37).
Page 2-32
Chapter 2: System hardware
Cabling and lightning protection
Table 37 LPU and grounding kit contents
Lightning protection units (LPUs)
LPU grounding point nuts and washers
ODU to top LPU drop cable (600 mm)
EMC strain relief cable glands
U-bolts, nuts and washers for mounting LPUs
ODU to top LPU ground cable (M6-M6)
Bottom LPU ground cable (M6-M10)
ODU to ground cable (M6-M10
One LPU and grounding kit (Table 37) is required for the PSU drop cable connection to the ODU. If
the ODU is to be connected to an auxiliary device, one additional LPU and grounding kit is
required for the Aux drop cable. Order the kits from Cambium Networks (Table 38).
Table 38 LPU and grounding kit part number
Cambium description
Cambium part number
PMP/PTP 450i LPU and Grounding Kit (One Kit Per End)
C000065L007
Page 2-33
Chapter 2: System hardware
Antennas and antenna cabling
Antennas and antenna cabling
Antenna requirements
Each connectorized ODU requires one external antenna (normally dual-polar).
For connectorized units operating in the USA or Canada 4.9 GHz, 5.1 GHz, 5.2 GHz, 5.4 GHz, 5.8
GHz or 900 MHz bands, choose external antennas which are recommended by Cambium
Networks. Do not install any other antennas.
Supported external AP antennas
The recommended AP external antennas are listed in Table 39.
Table 39 List of AP external antennas
Cambium description
Cambium part
number
5 GHz Horizontal and Vertical Polarization Antenna for 90 Degree
Sector
85009324001
5 GHz Horizontal and Vertical Polarization Antenna for 60 Degree
Sector
85009325001
900 MHz
16
12 dBi 90 degree Sector Antenna (Dual Slant)
900 MHz 13 dBi 65 degree Sector Antenna (Dual Slant)
N009045D002A
N009045D001A
Note
LINKPlanner, Cambium Networks planning tool, contains an up-to-date, exhaustive
list of antennas that can be used with Cambium Products.
Supported external SM antennas
The recommended PMP 450(i) SM external antennas is listed in Table 40.
Table 40 PMP 450(i) SM antenna
Cambium description
Cambium part
number
900 MHz 12 dBi gain directional antenna (Dual Slant)
N009045D003A
16
900 MHz support planned for future release.
Page 2-34
Chapter 2: System hardware
Antennas and antenna cabling
RF cable and connectors
RF cable of generic type LMR-400 is required for connecting the ODU to the antenna. N type male
connectors are required for connecting the RF cables to the connectorized ODU. Two connectors
are required per ODU. Use weatherproof connectors, preferably ones that are supplied with
adhesive lined heat shrink sleeves that are fitted over the interface between the cable and
connector. Order CNT-400 RF cable and N type male connectors from Cambium Networks (Table
41).
Table 41 RF cable and connector part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
50 Ohm Braided Coaxial Cable - 75 meter
30010194001
50 Ohm Braided Coaxial Cable - 500 meter
30010195001
RF Connector, N, Male, Straight for CNT-400 Cable
09010091001
Antenna accessories
Connectorized ODUs require the following additional components:
•
Cable grounding kits: Order one cable grounding kit for each grounding point on the antenna
cables. Refer to Lightning protection unit (LPU) and grounding kit on 2-32
•
Self-amalgamating and PVC tape: Order these items to weatherproof the RF connectors
•
Lightning arrestors: When the connectorized ODU is mounted indoors, lightning arrestors (not
LPUs) are required for protecting the antenna RF cables at building entry. One arrestor is
required per antenna cable. One example of a compatible lightning arrestor is the Polyphaser
LSXL-ME or LSXL (not supplied by Cambium Networks).
RJ45 connectors and spare glands
RJ45 connectors are required for plugging Cat5e cables into ODUs, LPUs, PoEs and other devices.
Order RJ45 connectors and crimp tool from Cambium Networks (Table 42).
The ODU is supplied with one environmental sealing gland for the drop cable.
Figure 12 Cable gland
Page 2-35
Chapter 2: System hardware
Antennas and antenna cabling
Table 42 RJ45 connector and spare gland part numbers
Cambium description
Cambium part number
Tyco/AMP, Mod Plug RJ45, 100 pack
WB3177
Tyco/AMP Crimp Tool
WB3211
RJ-45 Spare Grounding Gland - PG16 size (Qty. 10)
N000065L033
Page 2-36
Chapter 2: System hardware
GPS synchronization
GPS synchronization
GPS synchronization description
Cambium offers GPS synchronization to limit the network’s own self-interference. The Cluster
Management CMM provides Global Positioning System (GPS) synchronization to the Access Point
(AP) and all associated Subscriber Modules (SM). Network operators have a choice of UGPS and
CMM solutions to select the option that works best for the environment.
Universal GPS (UGPS)
The UGPS provides network synchronization for smaller networks where a CMM may not be cost
effective. The UGPS provides synchronization for one or two modules so that even remote areas at
the edge of the network can operate with synchronization for improved performance. The UGPS
works with all Cambium PMP radios. The UGPS has a small footprint and is easy to deploy.
Figure 13 UGPS
CMM4 (Rack Mount)
The Cluster Management Module (CMM) is the heart of the Cambium system’s synchronization
capability, which allows network operators to reuse frequencies and add capacity while ensuring
consistency in the quality of service to customers.
For operators who prefer indoor CMM mounting, Cambium offers the Rack-Mounted Cluster
Management Module 4. The unit is designed to be mounted onto a standard 19-inch
telecommunications rack and to allow the Cambium CMM4 to be co-located with other
telecommunications equipment.
Page 2-37
Chapter 2: System hardware
GPS synchronization
Figure 14 CMM4 (Rack Mount)
The CMM4 has two DC power inputs, one 29 V and one 56V. It can be used to power and
synchronize both 29V legacy products such as PMP 450 and 56V products such as PMP 450i
simultaneously.
If the 29V legacy products are connected to the CMM4, a 29V power supply needs to be connected.
If PMP/PTP 450(i) are connected to a CMM4, it needs to be connected with an external 56V PSU".
The CMM4 supports having two of the 56V and two of the 24V supplies for redundancy.
W arning
PMP 450 and PMP 450i require different wiring between the CMM4 and device. If a
PMP450 is replaced by a PMP 450(i) and the existing drop cable needs to be re-used,
the adapter "CMM4 56V power adapter, #N000045L001A" must be used between the
CMM4 and the existing drop cable.
Figure 15 CMM4 56V power adapter
Page 2-38
Chapter 2: System hardware
GPS synchronization
CMM4 56V power adapter cable pinout
Figure 16 CMM4 power adapter cabling diagram
J1
J2
1.
Shield
RJ45 Jack
RJ45 Plug
Table 43 CMM4 power adapter cable pinout
Plug J1 pin
Jack J2 pin
Screen
Screen
Page 2-39
Chapter 2: System hardware
GPS synchronization
CMM4 (Cabinet with switch)
Designed to deliver consistent and reliable wireless broadband service, the PMP/PTP system
gracefully scales to support large deployments. The cluster management module is the heart of
the system’s synchronization capability which allows network operators to re-use frequencies and
add capacity while ensuring consistency in the quality of service to customers. As a result,
subscribers can experience carrier-grade service even at the outer edge of the network.
Figure 17 CMM4 (Cabinet with switch)
CMM4 (Cabinet without switch)
This CMM includes all of the functionality listed above but there is no switch. This provides the
network operator the flexibility to use the switch of their choice with the power and
synchronization capabilities of the CMM4.
CMM4/CMMmicro
The CMM3 or CMMmicro (Cluster Management Module micro) provides power, GPS timing, and
networking connections for an AP cluster. The CMM3 is configurable through a web interface.
Page 2-40
Chapter 2: System hardware
GPS synchronization
The CMM3 contains an 8-port managed switch that supports Power over Ethernet (PoE) on each
port and connects any combination of APs, BHMs, BHSs, or Ethernet feed. The Cambium fixed
wireless broadband IP networks PoE differs from IEEE Standard 803.3af PoE, and the two should
not be intermixed. The CMM3 can auto-negotiate speed to match inputs that are either 100Base-TX
or 10Base-T, and either full duplex or half duplex, where the connected device is set to autonegotiate. Alternatively, these parameters are settable.
A CMM3 requires only one cable, terminating in an RJ-45 connector, for each connected module to
distribute
•
Ethernet signaling.
•
power to as many as 8 co-located modules—APs, BHMs, or BHSs. Through a browser
interface to the managed switch, ports can be powered or not.
•
sync to APs and BHMs. The CMM3 receives 1-pulse per second timing information from
Global Positioning System (GPS) satellites through an antenna (included) and passes the
timing pulse embedded in the 24-V power to the connected modules.
GPS status information is available at the CMM3, however
•
CMM3 provides time and date information to BHMs and APs if both the CMMmicro is
operating on CMMmicro Release 2.1 or later and the AP/BHM is operating on System
Release 4.2 or later. See Error! Reference source not found. on Page Error!
Bookmark not defined..
•
CMM3 does not provide time and date information to BHMs and APs if either the CMM3 is
operating on a release earlier than CMMmicro Release 2.1 or the AP/BHM is operating on a
release earlier than System Release 4.2.
A CMM3/CMM4 is shown in Figure 18 and Figure 19.
Figure 18 CMM3
Figure 19 Pole mounted CMM3
Page 2-41
Chapter 2: System hardware
Ordering the components
Ordering the components
This section describes how to select components for PMP/PTP 450(i) Greenfield network or
PMP/PTP 450i network migration. It specifies Cambium part numbers for PMP/PTP 450i
components.
Table 44 PMP/PTP 450i components
Cambium description
Cambium part
number
PMP 450i AP
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point (ROW)
C050045A001A
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point (FCC)
C050045A002A
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point (EU)
C050045A003A
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point (DES Only)
C050045A004A
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point (IC)
C050045A015A
5 GHz PMP 450i Integrated Access Point, 90 degree (ROW)
C050045A005A
5 GHz PMP 450i Integrated Access Point, 90 degree (FCC)
C050045A006A
5 GHz PMP 450i Integrated Access Point, 90 degree (EU)
C050045A007A
5 GHz PMP 450i Integrated Access Point, 90 degree (DES Only)
C050045A008A
5 GHz PMP 450i Integrated Access Point, 90°sector antenna (IC)
C050045A016A
900 MHz PMP 450i Connectorized Access Point
C009045A001A
PMP 450i SM
5 GHz PMP 450i Connectorized Subscriber Module
C050045C001A
5 GHz PMP 450i SM, Integrated High Gain Antenna
C050045C002A
900 MHz PMP 450i Connectorized Subscriber Module
C009045C001A
PTP 450i
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (ROW)
C050045B001A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (ROW)
C050045B002A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (FCC)
C050045B003A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (FCC)
C050045B004A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (EU)
C050045B005A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (EU)
C050045B006A
Page 2-42
Chapter 2: System hardware
Ordering the components
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Connectorized (DES Only)
C050045B007A
5 GHz PTP 450i END, Integrated High Gain Antenna (DES only)
C050045B008A
900 MHz PMP 450i Connectorized Backhaul
C009045B001A
Power supplies
Power supply, 60 W, 56 V with Gbps support
N000065L001B
AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector
C000065L002B
Ethernet cable adapter for CMM4
N000045L001A
Power over Ethernet midspan, 60 W, -48 VDC Input
N000000L036A
Accessories
Gigabit Surge Suppressor (56V)
C000000L033A
LPU and Grounding Kit (1 kit per ODU)
C000065L007A
Mounting brackets
Tilt Bracket Assembly
N000045L002A
Mounting Bracket (Integrated)
N000065L031A
Mounting Bracket (Connectorized)
N000065L032A
Accessories
5 GHz Horizontal and Vertical Polarization Antenna for 90 Degree
Sector
85009324001
5 GHz Horizontal and Vertical Polarization Antenna for 60 Degree
Sector
85009325001
900 MHz Horizontal and Vertical Polarization Antenna for 90 Degree
Sector
N009045D002A
900 MHz Horizontal and Vertical Polarization Antenna for 65 Degree
Sector
N009045D001A
900 MHz 12 dBi gain directional antenna (Dual Slant)
N009045D003A
50 Ohm Braided Coaxial Cable - 75 meter
30010194001
50 Ohm Braided Coaxial Cable - 500 meter
30010195001
RF Connector, N, Male, Straight for CNT-400 Cable
09010091001
Blanking Plug Pack (Qty 10)
N000065L036A
Extended W arranty
PMP 450 AP Extended Warranty, 1 Additional Year
SG00TS4009A
PMP 450 AP Extended Warranty, 2 Additional Years
SG00TS4017A
Page 2-43
Chapter 2: System hardware
Ordering the components
PMP 450 AP Extended Warranty, 4 Additional Years
SG00TS4025A
PMP 450 SM Extended Warranty, 1 Additional Year
SG00TS4010A
PMP 450 SM Extended Warranty, 2 Additional Years
SG00TS4018A
PMP 450 SM Extended Warranty, 4 Additional Years
SG00TS4026A
Page 2-44
Chapter 3:
System planning
This chapter provides information to help the user to plan a PMP/PTP 450(i) link.
The following topics are described in this chapter:
•
Typical deployment on page 3-2 contains diagrams illustrating typical PMP/PTP 450(i) site
deployments.
•
Site planning on page 3-7 describes factors to be considered when planning the proposed link
end sites, including grounding, lightning protection and equipment location.
•
Radio Frequency planning on page 3-14 describes how to plan PMP/PTP 450(i) links to conform
to the regulatory restrictions that apply in the country of operation.
•
Link planning on page 3-19 describes factors to be taken into account when planning links,
such as range, path loss and throughput.
•
Planning for connectorized units on page 3-22 describes factors to be taken into account when
planning to use connectorized ODUs with external antennas in PMP/PTP 450(i) links.
•
Data network planning on page 3-24 describes factors to be considered when planning
PMP/PTP 450(i) data networks.
•
Network management planning on page 3-32 describes how to plan for PMP/PTP 450(i) links to
be managed remotely using SNMP.
•
Security planning on page 3-33 describes how to plan for PMP/PTP 450(i) links to operate in
secure mode.
Page 3-1
Chapter 3: System planning
Typical deployment
Typical deployment
This section contains diagrams illustrating typical PMP/PTP 450(i) site deployments.
ODU with PoE interface to PSU
In the basic configuration, there is only one Ethernet interface, a copper Cat5e power over Ethernet
(POE) from the PSU to the ODU (PSU port), as shown in the following diagrams: mast or tower
installation (Figure 20 ), wall installation (Figure 21) and roof installation (Figure 22).
Figure 20 Mast or tower installation
Power over Ethernet CAT5e cable (gel-filled,
shielded with copper-plated steel)
ODU
Network CAT5e cable
ODU ground cables
Site grounding system
First point of contact
between drop cable
and tower
Intermediate
ground cable(s)
as required
Equipment building
or cabinet
Bottom LPU
PSU
AC
supply
Network
equipment
Building
entry
Tower ground bar
Ground ring
Page 3-2
Chapter 3: System planning
Typical deployment
Figure 21 Wall installation
Power over Ethernet CAT5e cable (gelfilled, shielded with copper-plated steel)
Network Cat5e cable
ODU ground cables
Site grounding system
ODU
First point of contact
between drop cable
and wall
Bottom LPU
PSU
AC supply
Network
equipment
Building entry
Ground ring
Page 3-3
Chapter 3: System planning
Typical deployment
Figure 22 Roof installation
Power over Ethernet CAT5e cable
(gel-filled, shielded with copperplated steel)
Air terminals (finials)
Network CAT5e cable
ODU
ODU ground cables
Site grounding system
Building entry point
Tower grounding
conductor
Drop cable inside building
Equipment room
Bottom LPU
PSU
AC
supply
Network
equipment
Equipment room entry point
Building ground ring
Page 3-4
AC
service
Chapter 3: System planning
Typical deployment
Figure 23 GPS receiver wall installation
Power over Ethernet
CAT5e cable (gel-filled,
shielded with copperplated steel)
Network Cat5e cable
Drop cable to top
LPU and ODU
ODU/ GPSGround
cables
Site grounding system
GPS receiver
First point of contact
between drop cable
and wall
AC+DC Power
Injector
CMM 4
PSU
AC supply
Network
equipment
Ground ring
Note
The CMM3 or CMM4 can be used for PMP/PTP 450 platform.
Page 3-5
Chapter 3: System planning
Typical deployment
Figure 24 GPS receiver tower or mast installation
Power over Ethernet CAT5e cable
(gel-filled, shielded with copperplated steel)
Network CAT5e cable
ODU/GPS ground cables
Site grounding system
GPS receiver
Equipment building
or cabinet
Power Injector
CMM 4
First point of
contact between
drop cable and
tower
Drop cable
to top LPU
and ODU
Intermediate
ground cable(s)
as required
PSU
AC
supply
Network
equipment
Tower ground bar
Ground ring
Note
The CMM3 or CMM4 can be used for PMP/PTP 450 platform.
Page 3-6
Chapter 3: System planning
Site planning
Site planning
This section describes factors to be considered when choosing sites for PMP or PTP radios, power
supplies, CMM4 (if applicable) and UGPS (if applicable).
Site selection for PMP/PTP radios
When selecting a site for the ODU, consider the following factors:
•
Height and location to ensure that people are kept away from the antenna; see Calculated
distances and power compliance margins on page 4-24.
•
Height and location to achieve the best radio path.
•
Indoor location where power supply LED indicators accessible and cable length should not
exceed maximum recommended length; see Power supply site selection
•
Ability to meet the requirements specified in Grounding and lightning protection on page 3-8.
•
Aesthetics and planning permission issues.
•
Cable lengths; see ODU interfaces on page 2-26.
•
The effect of strong winds on the installation; see ODU wind loading on page 3-11.
Calculated distances and power compliance margin
The calculated minimum separation distances, recommended distances and resulting margins for
each frequency band and antenna combination. These are conservative distances that include
compliance margins. At these and greater separation distances, the power density from the RF
field is below generally accepted limits for the general population.
PMP/PTP 450(i) equipment adheres to all applicable EIRP limits for transmit power when operating
in MIMO mode. Separation distances and compliance margins include compensation for both
transmitters.
Page 3-7
Chapter 3: System planning
Site planning
Power supply site selection
When selecting a site for the ODU power supply, consider the following factors:
•
Indoor location with no possibility of condensation, flooding or rising damp.
•
Availability of a mains electricity supply.
•
Located in an environment where it is not likely to exceed its operational temperature rating,
allowing for natural convection cooling.
•
Accessibility for viewing status indicator LED and connecting Ethernet cables.
•
Cable lengths; see ODU interfaces on page 2-26.
Maximum cable lengths
When installing PMP/PTP 450i Series ODU, the maximum permitted length of the shielded copper
Ethernet interface cable is 330 feet (100m) from AP/BHM/SM/BHS to their associated power
supplies or CMM4.
Grounding and lightning protection
W arning
Electro-magnetic discharge (lightning) damage is not covered under warranty. The
recommendations in this guide, when followed correctly, give the user the best
protection from the harmful effects of EMD. However 100% protection is neither
implied nor possible.
Structures, equipment and people must be protected against power surges (typically caused by
lightning) by conducting the surge current to ground via a separate preferential solid path. The
actual degree of protection required depends on local conditions and applicable local regulations.
To adequately protect a PMP/PTP 450(i) installation, both ground bonding and transient voltage
surge suppression are required.
Full details of lightning protection methods and requirements can be found in the international
standards IEC 61024-1 and IEC 61312-1, the U.S. National Electric Code ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984 or
section 54 of the Canadian Electric Code.
Note
International and national standards take precedence over the requirements in this
guide.
Page 3-8
Chapter 3: System planning
Site planning
Lightning protection zones
Use the rolling sphere method (Figure 25) to determine where it is safe to mount equipment. An
imaginary sphere, typically 50 meters in radius, is rolled over the structure. Where the sphere rests
against the ground and a strike termination device (such as a finial or ground bar), all the space
under the sphere is considered to be in the zone of protection (Zone B). Similarly, where the
sphere rests on two finials, the space under the sphere is considered to be in the zone of
protection.
Figure 25 Rolling sphere method to determine the lightning protection zones
Zone A: In this zone a direct lightning strike is possible. Do not mount equipment in this zone.
Zone B: In this zone, direct EMD (lightning) effects are still possible, but mounting in this zone
significantly reduces the possibility of a direct strike. Mount equipment in this zone.
W arning
Never mount equipment in Zone A. Mounting in Zone A may put equipment,
structures and life at risk.
Page 3-9
Chapter 3: System planning
Site planning
Site grounding system
Confirm that the site has a correctly installed grounding system on a common ground ring with
access points for grounding PMP/PTP 450(i) equipment.
If the outdoor equipment is to be installed on the roof of a high building (Figure 22), confirm that
the following additional requirements are met:
•
A grounding conductor is installed around the roof perimeter to form the main roof perimeter
lightning protection ring.
•
Air terminals are installed along the length of the main roof perimeter lightning protection
ring, typically every 6.1m (20ft).
•
The main roof perimeter lightning protection ring contains at least two down conductors
connected to the grounding electrode system. The down conductors should be physically
separated from one another, as far as practical.
ODU and external antenna location
Find a location for the ODU (and external antenna for connectorized units) that meets the following
requirements:
•
The equipment is high enough to achieve the best radio path.
•
People can be kept a safe distance away from the equipment when it is radiating. The safe
separation distances are defined in Calculated distances and power compliance margins on
page 4-24.
•
The equipment is lower than the top of the supporting structure (tower, mast or building) or its
lightning air terminal.
•
If the ODU is connectorized, select a mounting position that gives it maximum protection from
the elements, but still allows easy access for connecting and weatherproofing the cables. To
minimize cable losses, select a position where the antenna cable lengths can be minimized. If
diverse or two external antennas are being deployed, it is not necessary to mount the ODU at
the midpoint of the antennas.
ODU ambient temperature limits
Select a location where the ODU can operate within safe ambient temperature limits. The
following points need to be considered while selecting a location for the ODU:
•
The ODU must be mounted in a Restricted Access Location (as defined in EN 60950-1) if the
operating ambient temperature may exceed 40°C, including solar radiation.
•
If the ambient temperature never exceeds 40°C, the temperature of the external metal case
parts of the ODU will not exceed the touch temperature limit of 70°C.
•
If the ambient temperature never exceeds 60°C, the temperature of the external metal case
parts of the ODU will not exceed the touch temperature limit of 90°C.
Page 3-10
Chapter 3: System planning
Site planning
Note
A restricted access location is defined (in EN 60950-1) as one where access may only
be gained by use of a tool or lock and key, or other means of security, and access is
controlled by the authority responsible for the location. Access must only be gained
by persons who have been instructed about the reasons for the restrictions applied to
the location and about any precautions that must be taken. Examples of permissible
restricted access locations are a lockable equipment room or a lockable cabinet.
ODU wind loading
Ensure that the ODU and the structure on which it is mounted are capable of withstanding the
prevalent wind speeds at a proposed PMP/PTP 450i site. Wind speed statistics are available from
national meteorological offices.
The ODU and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of up to 323 kph
(200 mph).
Wind blowing on the ODU will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The
magnitude of the force depends on both wind strength and surface area of the ODU. Wind loading
is estimated using the following formulae:
•
•
Force (in kilogrammes) = 0.1045aV2
where:
“a” is the surface area in square meters, and
“V” is the wind speed in meters per second.
Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2
where:
“A” is the surface area in square feet, and
“v” is the wind speed in miles per hour.
Applying these formulae to the PMP/PTP 450i ODU at different wind speeds, the resulting wind
loadings are shown in Table 45 and Table 46.
Table 45 ODU wind loading (Newton)
Type of ODU
M ax surface
area (square
m eters)
W ind speed (kilometer per hour)
160
170
180
190
200
Connectorized
0.035
59
66
74
83
92
Directional
0.093
156
176
197
220
243
90 degree sector
0.126
211
238
267
298
330
Page 3-11
Chapter 3: System planning
Site planning
Table 46 ODU wind loading (lb force)
Type of ODU
M ax surface
area (square
feet)
W ind speed (m iles per hour)
80
100
120
140
150
Connectorized
0.377
13
15
16
18
19
Directional
1.001
35
39
43
47
51
90 degree sector
1.356
48
53
58
64
69
For a connectorized ODU, add the wind loading of the external antenna to that of the ODU. The
antenna manufacturer should be able to quote wind loading.
Drop cable grounding points
To estimate how many grounding kits are required for each drop cable, refer to the site installation
diagrams (Figure 20 , Figure 21 and Figure 22) and use the following criteria:
•
The drop cable shield must be grounded near the ODU at the first point of contact between the
drop cable and the mast, tower or building.
•
The drop cable shield must be grounded at the building entry point.
For mast or tower installations (Figure 20), use the following additional criteria:
•
The drop cable shield must be grounded at the bottom of the tower, near the vertical to
horizontal transition point. This ground cable must be bonded to the tower or tower ground
bus bar (TGB), if installed.
•
If the tower is greater than 61 m (200 ft) in height, the drop cable shield must be grounded at
the tower midpoint, and at additional points as necessary to reduce the distance between
ground cables to 61 m (200 ft) or less.
•
In high lightning-prone geographical areas, the drop cable shield must be grounded at spacing
between 15 to 22 m (50 to 75 ft). This is especially important on towers taller than 45 m (150 ft).
For roof installations (Figure 22), use the following additional criteria:
•
The drop cable shield must be bonded to the building grounding system at its top entry point
(usually on the roof).
•
The drop cable shield must be bonded to the building grounding system at the entry point to
the equipment room.
Page 3-12
Chapter 3: System planning
Site planning
LPU location
Find a location for the bottom LPU that meets the following requirements:
•
The bottom LPU can be connected to the drop cable from the ODU.
•
The bottom LPU is within 600 mm (24 in) of the point at which the drop cable enters the
building, enclosure or equipment room within a larger building.
•
The bottom LPU can be bonded to the grounding system.
Page 3-13
Chapter 3: System planning
Radio Frequency planning
Radio Frequency planning
This section describes how to plan PMP/PTP 450(i) links to conform to analysis of spectrum and
the regulatory restrictions that apply in the country of operation.
Regulatory limits
Many countries impose EIRP limits (Allowed EIRP) on products operating in the bands used by the
PMP/PTP 450(i) Series.
Refer to Country specific maximum transmit power (Chapter 9: Reference Information) on page 936 to determine what the maximum transmitted power and EIRP for PMP/PTP 450(i) Series that can
be used in each of countries and frequency band.
Caution
It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the PMP/PTP product is operated in
accordance with local regulatory limits.
Note
Contact the applicable radio regulator to find out whether or not registration of the
PMP/PTP 450(i) link is required.
Conforming to the limits
Ensure the link is configured to conform to local regulatory requirements by configuring the PMP
450(i) AP or PTP 450(i) BHM for the correct country. In the following situations, this does not
prevent operation outside the regulations:
•
When using connectorized ODUs with external antennas, the regulations may require the
maximum transmit power to be reduced.
Page 3-14
Chapter 3: System planning
Radio Frequency planning
Available spectrum
The available spectrum for operation depends on the regulatory band. When configured
appropriately, the unit will only allow operation on those channels which are permitted by the
regulations.
Certain regulations have allocated certain channels as unavailable for use:
•
FCC has allocated part of the 5.1 & 5.2 GHz
•
ETSI has allocated part of the 5.4 GHz band to weather radar.
•
UK and some other European countries have allocated part of the 5.8 GHz band to Road
Transport and Traffic Telematics (RTTT) systems.
The number and identity of channels barred in a given regulatory band is dependent on the
channel bandwidth and channel raster selected.
Analyzing the RF Environment
An essential element in RF network planning is the analysis of spectrum usage and the strength of
the signals that occupy the spectrum. Regardless of how these parameters are measured and log
or chart the results (through the Spectrum Analyzer feature or by using a spectrum analyzer),
ensure measurements are performed:
•
At various times of day.
•
On various days of the week.
•
Periodically into the future.
As new RF neighbors move in or consumer devices proliferate in currently used spectrum, this
keeps the user aware of the dynamic possibilities for interference within the network.
Channel bandwidth
Select the required channel bandwidth for the link. The selection depends upon the regulatory
band selected.
The wider the channel bandwidth, the greater the capacity. As narrower channel bandwidths take
up less spectrum, selecting a narrow channel bandwidth may be a better choice when operating in
locations where the spectrum is very busy.
Both ends of the link must be configured to operate on the same channel bandwidth.
Page 3-15
Chapter 3: System planning
Radio Frequency planning
Anticipating Reflection of Radio Waves
In the signal path, any object that is larger than the wavelength of the signal can reflect the signal.
Such an object can even be the surface of the earth or of a river, bay or lake. The wavelength of the
signal is approximately
•
2 inches (or 5 cm) for 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz signals.
•
12 inches for 900 MHz signals
A reflected signal can arrive at the antenna of the receiver later than the non-reflected signal
arrives. These two or more signals cause the condition known as multipath. Multipath may
increase or decrease the signal level, resulting in overall attenuation that may be higher or lower
than that caused by the link distance. This is problematic at the margin of the link budget, where
the standard operating margin (fade margin) may be compromised.
Obstructions in the Fresnel Zone
The Fresnel (pronounced fre·NEL) Zone is a three-dimensional volume around the line of sight of
an antenna transmission. Objects that penetrate this area can cause the received strength of the
transmitted signal to fade. Out-of-phase reflections and absorption of the signal result in signal
cancellation.
The foliage of trees and plants in the Fresnel Zone can cause signal loss. Seasonal density,
moisture content of the foliage, and other factors such as wind may change the amount of loss.
Plan to perform frequent and regular link tests if you must transmit through foliage.
Planning for co-location
The first step to avoid interference in wireless systems is to set all AP/BHMs to receive timing from
a synchronization source (Cluster Management Module, or Universal Global Positioning System).
This ensures that the modules are in sync and start transmitting at the same time each frame.
The second step to avoid interference is to configure parameters on all AP/BHMs of the same
frequency band in proximity such that they have compatible transmit/receive ratios (all stop
transmitting each frame before any start receiving). This avoids the problem of one AP/BHM
attempting to receive the signal from a distant SM/BHS while a nearby AP/BHM transmits, which
could overpower that signal.
The following parameters on the AP/BHM determine the transmit/receive ratio:
•
Downlink Data percentage
•
(reserved) Contention slots
If OFDM (PMP/PTP 450(i), PMP/PTP 230) and FSK (PMP/PTP 1x0) APs/BHMs of the same frequency
band are in proximity, or if you want BHMs set to different parameters then you must use the
Frame Calculator to identify compatible settings for APs/BHMs.
Page 3-16
Chapter 3: System planning
Radio Frequency planning
The Frame Calculator is available on the web management interface Tools > Frame Calculator.
To use the Frame Calculator, type into the calculator various configurable parameter values for
each proximal AP/BHM and then record the resulting AP/BHM Receive Start value. Next vary the
Downlink Data percentage in each calculation and iterate until a calculated AP/BHM Receive Start
for all collocated APs/BHMs are within 300 bit times; if possible, within 150 bit times. In Cambium
Point-to-Multipoint systems, 10 bit times = 1 µs.
For more information on PTP 450(i) co-location, see
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/solution-papers
Multiple OFDM Access Point Clusters
When deploying multiple AP clusters in a dense area, consider aligning the clusters as shown
below. However, this is only a recommendation. An installation may dictate a different pattern of
channel assignments.
Figure 26 Example layout of 16 Access Point sectors (ABCD), 90 degree sectors
An example for assignment of frequency channels is provided in the following table.
Page 3-17
Chapter 3: System planning
Radio Frequency planning
Table 47 Example 5.8 GHz 4-channel assignment by access site
Symbol
Frequency
5.740 GHz
5.760 GHz
5.780 GHz
5.800 GHz
Figure 27 Example layout of 6 Access Point sectors (ABC), 60 degree sectors
An example for assignment of frequency channels and sector IDs is provided in the following
table.
Table 48 Example 5.8 GHz 3-channel assignment by access site
Symbol
Frequency
5.740 GHz
5.760 GHz
5.780 GHz
Page 3-18
Chapter 3: System planning
Link planning
Link planning
This section describes factors to be taken into account when planning links, such as range,
obstacles path loss and throughput. LINKPlanner is recommended.
Range and obstacles
Calculate the range of the link and identify any obstacles that may affect radio performance.
Perform a survey to identify all the obstructions (such as trees or buildings) in the path and to
assess the risk of interference. This information is necessary in order to achieve an accurate link
feasibility assessment.
The PMP/PTP 450(i) Series is designed to operate in Non-Line-of-Sight (NLoS) and Line-of-Sight
(LoS) environments. An NLOS environment is one in which there is no optical line-of-sight, that is,
there are obstructions between the antennas.
OFDM technology can often use multi-pathing to an advantage to overcome nLOS, especially in
cases where the Fresnel zone is only partially blocked by buildings, “urban canyons”, or foliage.
OFDM tends to help especially when obstacles are near the middle of the link, and less so when
the obstacles are very near the ODU.
However, attenuation through walls and trees is substantial for any use of the 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz
frequency bands. The lower frequency radio waves of 900 MHz radios provide greater penetration
through walls, trees and other obstacles, making it optimal for most non-line-of-sight applications.
Even with OFDM, these products are not expected to penetrate walls or extensive trees and
foliage.
Path loss
Path loss is the amount of attenuation the radio signal undergoes between the two ends of the
link. The path loss is the sum of the attenuation of the path if there were no obstacles in the way
(Free Space Path Loss), the attenuation caused by obstacles (Excess Path Loss) and a margin to
allow for possible fading of the radio signal (Fade Margin). The following calculation needs to be
performed to judge whether a particular link can be installed:
L free _ space + Lexcess + L fade + Lseasonal < Lcapability
Where:
Is:
L free _ space
Free Space Path Loss (dB)
Lexcess
Excess Path Loss (dB)
L fade
Fade Margin Required (dB)
Lseasonal
Seasonal Fading (dB)
Page 3-19
Chapter 3: System planning
Lcapability
Link planning
Equipment Capability (dB)
Calculating Link Loss
The link loss is the total attenuation of the wireless signal between two point-to-multipoint units.
The link loss calculation is presented below:
Link Loss (dB) = Transmit power of the remote wireless unit (dBm) − Tx Cable loss
(dB) − Received power at the local unit (dBm) – Rx cable loss (dB) +
Antenna gain at the remote unit (dBi) + Antenna gain at the local unit
(dBi)
Calculating Rx Signal Level
The determinants in Rx signal level are illustrated in Figure 28.
Figure 28 Determinants in Rx signal level
The linked image cannot be displayed. The file may have been moved, renamed, or deleted. Verify that the link points to the correct file and location.
Rx signal level is calculated as follows:
Rx signal level dB = Tx power − Tx cable loss + Tx antenna gain
− free space path loss + Rx antenna gain − Rx cable loss
Note
This Rx signal level calculation presumes that a clear line of sight is established
between the transmitter and receiver and that no objects encroach in the Fresnel zone.
Page 3-20
Chapter 3: System planning
Link planning
Calculating Fade Margin
Free space path loss is a major determinant in Rx (received) signal level. Rx signal level, in turn, is
a major factor in the system operating margin (fade margin), which is calculated as follows:
System operating margin (fade margin) dB = Rx signal level dB − Rx sensitivity dB
Thus, fade margin is the difference between strength of the received signal and the strength that
the receiver requires for maintaining a reliable link. A higher fade margin is characteristic of a
more reliable link.
Adaptive modulation
Adaptive modulation ensures that the highest throughput that can be achieved instantaneously
will be obtained, taking account of propagation and interference. When the link has been installed,
web pages provide information about the link loss currently measured by the equipment, both
instantaneously and averaged. The averaged value will require maximum seasonal fading to be
added, and then the radio reliability of the link can be computed.
For details of the system throughput, link loss and maximum distance for each frequency band in
all modulation modes, see Link on page 9-25.
Page 3-21
Chapter 3: System planning
Planning for connectorized units
Planning for connectorized units
This section describes factors to be taken into account when planning to use connectorized ODUs
with external antennas in PMP/PTP 450(i) links.
When to install connectorized units
The majority of radio links can be successfully deployed with the integrated ODU. However the
integrated units may not be sufficient in some areas, for example:
•
Where the path is heavily obscured by dense woodland on an NLOS link.
•
Where long LOS links are required.
•
Where there are known to be high levels of interference.
In these areas, connectorized ODUs and external antennas should be used.
Choosing external antennas
When selecting external antennas, consider the following factors:
•
The required antenna gain.
•
Ease of mounting and alignment.
•
Use dual-polarization antenna (as the integrated antenna).
Note
Enter the antenna gain and cable loss into the Installation Wizard, if the country
selected has an EIRP limit, the corresponding maximum transmit power will be
calculated automatically by the unit.
Calculating RF cable length (5.8 GHz FCC only)
The 5.8 GHz band FCC approval for the product is based on tests with a cable loss between the
ODU and antenna of not less than 1.2 dB. If cable loss is below 1.2 dB with a 1.3 m (4 ft) diameter
external antenna, the connectorized PMP/PTP 450(i) may exceed the maximum radiated spurious
emissions allowed under FCC 5.8 GHz rules.
Cable loss depends mainly upon cable type and length. To meet or exceed the minimum loss of
1.2 dB, use cables of the type and length specified in Table 49 (source: Times Microwave). This
data excludes connector losses.
Page 3-22
Chapter 3: System planning
Planning for connectorized units
Table 49 RF cable lengths required to achieve 1.2 dB loss at 5.8 GHz
RF cable type
M inim um cable length
LMR100
0.6 m (1.9 ft)
LMR200
1.4 m (4.6 ft)
LMR300
2.2 m (7.3 ft)
LMR400
3.4 m (11.1 ft)
LMR600
5.0 m (16.5 ft)
Page 3-23
Chapter 3: System planning
Data network planning
Data network planning
This section describes factors to be considered when planning PMP/PTP 450(i) data networks.
Understanding addresses
A basic understanding of Internet Protocol (IP) address and subnet mask concepts is required for
engineering your IP network.
IP address
The IP address is a 32-bit binary number that has four parts (octets). This set of four octets has two
segments, depending on the class of IP address. The first segment identifies the network. The
second identifies the hosts or devices on the network. The subnet mask marks a boundary
between these two sub-addresses.
Dynamic or static addressing
For any computer to communicate with a module, the computer must be configured to either
•
use DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). In this case, when not connected to the
network, the computer derives an IP address on the 169.254 network within two minutes.
•
have an assigned static IP address (for example, 169.254.1.5) on the 169.254 network.
Note
If an IP address that is set in the module is not the 169.254.x.x network address, then
the network operator must assign the computer a static IP address in the same subnet.
When a DHCP server is not found
To operate on a network, a computer requires an IP address, a subnet mask, and possibly a
gateway address. Either a DHCP server automatically assigns this configuration information to a
computer on a network or an operator must input these items.
When a computer is brought on line and a DHCP server is not accessible (such as when the server
is down or the computer is not plugged into the network), Microsoft and Apple operating systems
default to an IP address of 169.254.x.x and a subnet mask of 255.255.0.0 (169.254/16, where /16
indicates that the first 16 bits of the address range are identical among all members of the subnet).
Page 3-24
Chapter 3: System planning
Data network planning
DNS Client
The DNS Client is used to resolve names of management servers within the operator’s
management domain (see Figure 29). This feature allows hostname configuration for NTP servers,
Authorization Servers, DHCP relay servers, and SNMP trap servers. Operators may choose to
either enter in the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) for the host name or to manually enter the
IP addresses of the servers.
Figure 29 Cambium networks management domain
Network Address Translation (NAT)
NAT, DHCP Server, DHCP Client and DMZ in SM
The system provides NAT (network address translation) for SMs in the following combinations of
NAT and DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol):
•
NAT Disabled
•
NAT with DHCP Client (DHCP selected as the Connection Type of the WAN interface) and
DHCP Server
•
NAT with DHCP Client(DHCP selected as the Connection Type of the WAN interface)
•
NAT with DHCP Server
•
NAT without DHCP
NAT
NAT isolates devices connected to the Ethernet/wired side of a SM from being seen directly from
the wireless side of the SM. With NAT enabled, the SM has an IP address for transport traffic
(separate from its address for management), terminates transport traffic, and allows you to assign
a range of IP addresses to devices that are connected to the Ethernet/wired side of the SM.
Page 3-25
Chapter 3: System planning
Data network planning
In the Cambium system, NAT supports many protocols, including HTTP, ICMP (Internet Control
Message Protocols), and FTP (File Transfer Protocol). For virtual private network (VPN)
implementation, L2TP over IPSec (Level 2 Tunneling Protocol over IP Security) and PPTP (Point to
Point Tunneling Protocol) are supported.
DHCP
DHCP enables a device to be assigned a new IP address and TCP/IP parameters, including a default
gateway, whenever the device reboots. Thus DHCP reduces configuration time, conserves IP
addresses, and allows modules to be moved to a different network within the Cambium system.
In conjunction with the NAT features, each SM provides:
•
A DHCP server that assigns IP addresses to computers connected to the SM by Ethernet
protocol.
•
A DHCP client that receives an IP address for the SM from a network DHCP server.
DMZ
In conjunction with the NAT features, a DMZ (demilitarized zone) allows the assignment of one IP
address behind the SM for a device to logically exist outside the firewall and receive network
traffic. The first three octets of this IP address must be identical to the first three octets of the NAT
private IP address.
Developing an IP addressing scheme
Network elements are accessed through IP Version 4 (IPv4) addressing.
A proper IP addressing method is critical to the operation and security of a network.
Each module requires an IP address on the network. This IP address is for only management
purposes. For security, you must either:
•
Assign a non-routable IP address.
•
Assign a routable IP address only if a firewall is present to protect the module.
You assign an IP addresses to computers and network components by either static or dynamic IP
addressing. You will also assign the appropriate subnet mask and network gateway to each
module.
Address Resolution Protocol
As previously stated, the MAC address identifies a module in:
•
Communications between modules.
•
The data that modules store about each other.
Page 3-26
Chapter 3: System planning
Data network planning
The IP address is essential for data delivery through a router interface. Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP) correlates MAC addresses to IP addresses.
For communications to outside the network segment, ARP reads the network gateway address of
the router and translates it into the MAC address of the router. Then the communication is sent to
MAC address (physical network interface card) of the router.
For each router between the sending module and the destination, this sequence applies. The ARP
correlation is stored until the ARP cache times out.
Allocating subnets
The subnet mask is a 32-bit binary number that filters the IP address. Where a subnet mask
contains a bit set to 1, the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network address.
Example IP address and subnet mask
In Figure 30, the first 16 bits of the 32-bit IP address identify the network:
Figure 30 Example of IP address in Class B subnet
Octet 1
Octet 2
Octet 3
Octet 4
IP address 169.254.1.1
10101001
11111110
00000001
00000001
Subnet mask 255.255.0.0
11111111
11111111
00000000
00000000
In this example, the network address is 169.254 and 216 (65,536) hosts are addressable.
Selecting non-routable IP addresses
The factory default assignments for network elements are:
•
Unique MAC address
•
IP address of 169.254.1.1
•
Subnet mask of 255.255.0.0
•
Network gateway address of 169.254.0.0
For each radio and CMM4, assign an IP address that is both consistent with the IP addressing plan
for your network and cannot be accessed from the Internet. IP addresses within the following
ranges are not routable from the Internet, regardless of whether a firewall is configured:
•
10.0.0.0 – 10.255.255.255
•
172.16.0.0 – 172.31.255.255
•
192.168.0.0 – 192.168.255.255
Also, the subnet mask and network gateway for each CMM4 can be assigned.
Page 3-27
Chapter 3: System planning
Data network planning
Translation bridging
Optionally, the AP can be configured to change the source MAC address in every packet it receives
from its SMs to the MAC address of the SM/BHS that bridged the packet, before forwarding the
packet toward the public network. In this case:
•
Not more than 128 IP devices at any time are valid to send data to the AP from behind the SM.
•
SM populates the Translation Table tab of its Statistics web page, displaying the MAC address
and IP address of all the valid connected devices.
•
Each entry in the Translation Table is associated with the number of minutes that have elapsed
since the last packet transfer between the connected device and the SM.
•
If 128 are connected, and another attempts to connect:
•
If no Translation Table entry is older than 255 minutes, the attempt is ignored.
If an entry is older than 255 minutes, the oldest entry is removed and the attempt is
successful.
The Send Untranslated ARP parameter in the General tab of the Configuration page can be:
Disabled, so that the AP overwrites the MAC address in ARP packets before forwarding
them.
Enabled, so that the AP forwards ARP packets regardless of whether it has overwritten the
MAC address.
This is the Translation Bridging feature, which you can enable in the General page of the
Configuration web page in the AP. When this feature is disabled, the setting of the
Send Untranslated ARP parameter has no effect, because all packets are forwarded
untranslated (with the source MAC address intact). See Address Resolution Protocol on Page 3-26.
Engineering VLANs
The radios support VLAN functionality as defined in the 802.1Q (Virtual LANs) specification, except
for the following aspects of that specification:
•
Protocols:
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) GARV
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP)
•
Embedded source routing (ERIF) in the 802.1Q header
•
Multicast pruning
•
Flooding unknown unicast frames in the downlink
As an additional exception, the AP/BHM does not flood downward the unknown unicast frames to
the SM/BHS.
A VLAN configuration in Layer 2 establishes a logical group within the network. Each computer in
the VLAN, regardless of initial or eventual physical location, has access to the same data. For the
network operator, this provides flexibility in network segmentation, simpler management, and
enhanced security.
Page 3-28
Chapter 3: System planning
Data network planning
Special case VLAN numbers
This system handles special case VLAN numbers according to IEEE specifications:
Table 50 Special case VLAN IDs
VLAN
Num ber
Purpose
Usage Constraint
These packets have 802.1p priority, but are
otherwise handled as untagged.
Must not be used as a
management VLAN.
Although not noted as special case by IEEE
specifications, these packets identify traffic
that was untagged upon ingress into the SM
and must remain untagged upon egress.
This policy is hard-coded in the AP.
Must not be used for
system VLAN traffic.
This VLAN is reserved for internal use.
Must not be used at all.
4095
SM membership in VLANs
With the supported VLAN functionality, the radios determine bridge forwarding on the basis of not
only the destination MAC address, but also the VLAN ID of the destination. This provides flexibility
in how SMs are used:
•
Each SM can be a member in its own VLAN.
•
Each SM can be in its own broadcast domain, such that only the radios that are members of
the VLAN can see broadcast and multicast traffic to and from the SM.
•
The network operator can define a work group of SMs, regardless of the AP(s) to which they
register.
Page 3-29
Chapter 3: System planning
Data network planning
PMP 450(i) modules provide the VLAN frame filters that are described in Table 51.
Table 51 VLAN filters in point-to-multipoint modules
W here VLAN is
active,
if this param eter
value is selected …
any combination of
VLAN
parameter settings
then a fram e is discarded if…
entering the bridge/
NAT switch through…
Ethernet…
because of this
VLAN filter in the
software:
TCP/IP…
with a VID not in the
membership table
any combination of
VLAN
parameter settings
Ingress
with a VID not in
the
membership table
Local Ingress
Allow Fram e Types:
Tagged Frames Only
with no 802.1Q tag
Only Tagged
Allow Fram e Types:
Untagged Fram es
Only
with an 802.1Q tag,
regardless of VID
Only Untagged
Local SM
Managem ent:
Disable in the SM, or
All Local SM
Managem ent:
Disable in the AP
with an 802.1Q tag
and a VID in the
membership table
Local SM Management
leaving the bridge/
NAT switch through…
Ethernet…
any combination of
VLAN
parameter settings
any combination of
VLAN
parameter settings
TCP/IP…
with a VID not in the
membership table
Egress
with a VID not in
the
membership table
Page 3-30
Local Egress
Chapter 3: System planning
Data network planning
Priority on VLANs (802.1p)
The radios can prioritize traffic based on the eight priorities described in the IEEE 802.1p
specification. When the high-priority channel is enabled on a SM, regardless of whether VLAN is
enabled on the AP for the sector, packets received with a priority of 4 through 7 in the 802.1p field
are forwarded onto the high-priority channel.
Operators may configure priority precedence as 802.1p Then Diffserv (Default) or Diffserv Then
802.1p. Since these priority precedence configurations are independent between the AP and SM,
this setting must be configured on both the AP and SM to ensure that the precedence is adhered to
by both sides of the link.
VLAN settings can also cause the module to convert received non-VLAN packets into VLAN
packets. In this case, the 802.1p priority in packets leaving the module is set to the priority
established by the DiffServ configuration.
If VLAN is enabled, immediately monitor traffic to ensure that the results are as desired. For
example, high-priority traffic may block low-priority.
Q-in-Q DVLAN (Double-VLAN) Tagging (802.1ad)
PMP and PTP modules can be configured with 802.1ad Q-in-Q DVLAN (Double-VLAN) tagging
which is a way for an operator to put an 802.1Q VLAN inside of an 802.1ad VLAN. A nested VLAN,
which is the original 802.1Q tag and a new second 802.1ad tag, allows for bridging of VLAN traffic
across a network and segregates the broadcast domains of 802.1Q VLANs. Q-in-Q can be used
with PPPoE and/or NAT.
The 802.1ad standard defines the S-VLAN as the Service Provider VLAN and the C-VLAN as the
customer VLAN. The radio software does 2 layer Q-in-Q whereby the C-VLAN is the 802.1Q tag and
the S-VLAN is the second layer Q tag as shown in Table 52.
Table 52 Q-in-Q Ethernet frame
Ethernet Header
S-VLAN EthType
0x88a8
C-VLAN EthType
0x8100
IP Data EthType 0x0800
The 802.1ad S-VLAN is the outer VLAN that is configurable on the Configuration > VLAN web
page of the AP/BHM. The Q-in-Q EtherType parameter is configured with a default EtherType of
0x88a8 in addition to four alternate EtherTypes that can be configured to aid in interoperability
with existing networks that use a different EtherType than the default.
The C-VLAN is the inner VLAN tag, which is the same as 802.1Q. As a top level concept, this
operates on the outermost tag at any given time, either “pushing” a tag on or “popping” a tag off.
This means packets will at most transition from an 802.1Q frame to an 801.ad frame (with a tag
“pushed” on) or an untagged 802.1 frame (with the tag “popped” off. Similarly, for an 802.1ad
frame, this can only transition from an 802.1ad frame to an 802.1Q frame (with the tag “popped”
off) since the radio software only supports 2 levels of tags.
Page 3-31
Chapter 3: System planning
Network management planning
Network management planning
This section describes how to plan for PMP/PTP 450(i) links to be managed remotely using SNMP.
Planning for SNMP operation
Cambium modules provide the following SNMP traps for automatic notifications to the NMS:
•
coldStart, which signals that the SNMPv2c element is reinitializing itself and that its
configuration may have been altered.
•
warmStart, which signals that the SNMPv2c element is reinitializing such that its configuration
is unaltered.
•
authenticationFailure, which signals that the SNMPv2c element has received a protocol
message that is not properly authenticated (contingent on the snmpEnableAuthenTraps object
setting).
•
linkDown, as defined in RFC 1573
•
linkUp, as defined in RFC 1573
•
egpNeighborLoss, as defined in RFC 1213
•
whispGPSInSync, which signals a transition from not synchronized to synchronized.
•
whispGPSOutSync, which signals a transition from synchronized to not synchronized.
•
whispRegComplete, which signals registration completed.
•
whispRegLost, which signals registration lost.
•
whispRadarDetected, which signals that the one-minute scan has been completed, radar has
been detected and the radio will shut down.
•
whispRadarEnd, which signals that the one-minute scan has been completed, radar has not
been detected and the radio will resume normal operation.
Note
The proprietary MIBs are provided in the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series software download
files in the support website (see Contacting Cambium Networks on page 1).
Enabling SNMP
Enable the SNMP interface for use by configuring the following attributes in the SNMP
Configuration page:
•
SNMP State (default disabled)
•
SNMP Version (default SNMPv2c)
•
SNMP Port Number (default 161)
Page 3-32
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
Security planning
This section describes how to plan for PMP/PTP 450(i) links to operate in secure mode.
•
Managing module access by passwords
•
Filtering protocols and ports
•
Port Configuration
Isolating AP/BHM from the Internet
Ensure that the IP addresses of the AP/BHM in the network:
•
are not routable over the Internet.
•
do not share the subnet of the IP address of your user.
RFC 1918, Address Allocation for Private Subnets, reserves for private IP networks three blocks of
IP addresses that are not routable over the Internet:
•
/8 subnets have one reserved network, 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255.
•
/16 subnets have 16 reserved networks, 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255.
•
/24 subnets have 256 reserved networks, 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255.
Encrypting radio transmissions
Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP systems employ the following form of encryption for
security of the wireless link:
•
DES (Data Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses secret
56-bit keys and 8 parity bits. DES performs a series of bit permutations, substitutions, and
recombination operations on blocks of data. DES encryption does not affect the performance
or throughput of the system.
•
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses
the Rijndael algorithm and 128-bit keys to establish a higher level of security than DES. AES
products are certified as compliant with the Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS
197) in the U.S.A.
Page 3-33
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
Planning for HTTPS operation
Before starting to configure HTTPS operation, ensure that the cryptographic material listed in
Table 53 is available.
Table 53 HTTPS security material
Item
Description
Quantity required
User Defined Security
Banner
The banner provides warnings and notices
to be read by the user before logging in to
the ODU. Use text that is appropriate to
the network security policy.
Normally one per link.
This depends upon
network policy.
Port numbers for HTTP,
HTTPS and Telnet
Port numbers allocated by the network.
As allocated by
network.
Planning for SNMPv3 operation
SNMP security mode
Decide how SNMPv3 security will be configured.
MIB-based security management uses standard SNMPv3 MIBs to configure the user-based
security model and the view-based access control model. This approach provides considerable
flexibility, allowing a network operator to tailor views and security levels appropriate for different
types of user. MIB-based security management may allow a network operator to take advantage of
built-in security management capabilities of existing network managers.
Web-based security management allows an operator to configure users, security levels, privacy
and authentication protocols, and passphrases using the PMP/PTP 450(i) web-based management
interface. The capabilities supported are somewhat less flexible than those supported using the
MIB-based security management, but will be sufficient in many applications. Selection of webbased management for SNMPv3 security disables the MIB-based security management. PMP/PTP
450(i) does not support concurrent use of MIB-based and web-based management of SNMPv3
security.
Web-based management of SNMPv3 security
Initial configuration of SNMPv3 security is available only to HTTP or HTTPS user accounts with
security role of Security Officer.
Identify the format used for SNMP Engine ID. The following formats are available:
•
MAC address (default)
•
5 and 32 hex characters (the hex character input is driven by RFC 3411 recommendations on
the Engine ID)
Page 3-34
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
Identify the user names and security roles of initial SNMPv3 users. Two security roles are
available:
•
Read Only
•
System Administrator
Identify the security level for each of the security roles. Three security levels are available:
(a) No authentication, no privacy
(b) Authentication, no privacy
(c) Authentication, privacy
If authentication is required, identify the protocol. The authentication protocol available is MD5.
If privacy will be used, identify the protocol. The privacy protocol available is cbc-des.
Managing module access by passwords
From the factory, each module has a preconfigured administrator-level account in the name root,
which initially requires no associated password. When you upgrade a module:
•
An account is created in the name admin.
•
Both admin and root inherit the password that was previously used to access the module, if:
Full Access password, if one was set.
Display-Only Access password, if one was set and no Full Access password was set.
Caution
If you use Wireless Manager, do not delete the root account from any module. If you
use a NMS that communicates with modules through SNMP, do not delete the root
account from any module unless you first can confirm that the NMS does not rely on
the root account for access to the modules.
Each module supports four or fewer user accounts, regardless of account levels. The available
levels are
•
ADMINISTRATOR, who has full read and write permissions. This is the level of the root and
admin users, as well as any other administrator accounts that one of them creates.
•
INSTALLER, who has permissions identical to those of ADMINISTRATOR except that the
installer cannot add or delete users or change the password of any other user.
•
TECHNICIAN, who has permissions to modify basic radio parameters and view informational
web pages.
•
GUEST, who has no write permissions and only a limited view of General Status tab.
•
Admin, Installer and Tech accounts can be configured as READ-ONLY. This will allow the
account to only see the items.
The ability to view information of General Status tab can be controlled by the "Site Information
Viewable to Guest Users" under the SNMP tab.
Page 3-35
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
From the factory default state, configure passwords for both the root and admin account at the
ADMINISTRATOR permission level, using the Account > Change Users Password page. (If
configure only one of these, then the other will still require no password for access into it and thus
remain a security risk.) If you are intent on configuring only one of them, delete the admin account.
The root account is the only account that CNUT uses to update the module.
After a password has been set for any ADMINISTRATOR-level account, initial access to the module
GUI opens the view of GUEST level.
Planning for RADIUS operation
Configure RADIUS where remote authentication is required for users of the web-based interface.
Remote authentication has the following advantages:
•
Control of passwords can be centralized.
•
Management of user accounts can be more sophisticated. For example; users can be prompted
by a network manager to change passwords at regular intervals. As another example,
passwords can be checked for inclusion of dictionary words and phrases.
•
Passwords can be updated without reconfiguring multiple network elements.
•
User accounts can be disabled without reconfiguring multiple network elements.
Remote authentication has one significant disadvantage in a wireless link product such as
PMP/PTP 450(i). If the wireless link is down, a unit on the remote side of the broken link may be
prevented from contacting a RADIUS Server, with the result that users are unable to access the
web-based interface.
One useful strategy would be to combine RADIUS authentication for normal operation with a
single locally-authenticated user account for emergency use.
PMP 450(i) SM provides a choice of the following authentication methods:
•
EAP-MSCHAPv2
•
EAP-TTLS
Ensure that the authentication method selected in PMP/PTP 450(i) is supported by the RADIUS
server.
Filtering protocols and ports
Configure filters for specified protocols and ports from leaving the AP/BHM and SM/BHS and
entering the network. This protects the network from both intended and inadvertent packet loading
or probing by network users. By keeping the specified protocols or ports off the network, this
feature also provides a level of protection to users from each other.
Protocol and port filtering is set per AP/SM/BH. Except for filtering of SNMP ports, filtering occurs
as packets leave the AP/SM/BH.
For example, if SM is configured to filter SNMP, then SNMP packets are blocked from entering the
SM and, thereby, from interacting with the SNMP portion of the protocol stack on the SM.
Page 3-36
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
Port Filtering with NAT Enabled
Where NAT is enabled on the SM/BHS, the filtering can be enabled for only the user-defined ports.
The following are examples for situations where the configure port can be filtered where NAT is
enabled:
•
To block a subscriber from using FTP, you can filter Ports 20 and 21 (the FTP ports) for both the
TCP and UDP protocols.
•
To block a subscriber from access to SNMP, you can filter Ports 161 and 162 (the SNMP ports)
for both the TCP and UDP protocols.
Note
In only the SNMP case, filtering occurs before the packet interacts with the protocol
stack.
Protocol and Port Filtering with NAT Disabled
Where NAT is disabled on the SM/BHS, the filtering can be enabled for both protocols and the
three user-defined ports. Using the check boxes on the interface, it can be either:
•
Allow all protocols except those that user wish to block.
•
Block all protocols except those that user wish to allow.
Allow or block any of the following protocols:
•
PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet)
•
Any or all of the following IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4) protocols:
•
Any or all of the following IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4) protocols:
•
SMB (Network Neighborhood)
SNMP
Bootp Client
Bootp Server
Up to 3 user-defined ports
All other IPv4 traffic (see Figure 29)
Any or all of the following IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6) protocols:
SMB (Network Neighborhood)
SNMP
Bootp Client
Bootp Server
Up to 3 user-defined ports
All other IPv6 traffic (see Figure 29)
•
Filter Direction – Upstream and Downstream
•
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol)
Page 3-37
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
Figure 31 Categorical protocol filtering
BootP
Server
BootP
Client
IPv4
Multica
st
SNMP
All
Other
IPv4
User
Defined
Port 1
SMB
User
Defined
Port 2
User
Defined
Port 3
ARP
PPPoE
All
Others
The following are example situations in which the protocol filtering is configured where NAT is
disabled:
•
If a subscriber is blocked from only PPPoE and SNMP, then the subscriber retains access to all
other protocols and all ports.
•
If PPPoE, IPv4, and Uplink Broadcast are blocked, and also check the All others selection,
then only Address Resolution Protocol is not filtered.
The ports filtered as a result of protocol selections in the Protocol Filtering tab of the SM/BHS
are listed in Table 54.
Page 3-38
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
Table 54 Ports filtered per protocol selections
Protocol Selected
Port Filtered (Blocked)
Destination Ports UDP : 137, 138, 139, 445, 3702 and 1900
SMB
Destination Ports TCP : 137, 138, 139, 445, 2869, 5357 and 5358
SNMP
Destination Ports TCP and UDP : 161 and 162
Bootp Client
Source Port 68 UDP
Bootp Server
Source Port 67 UDP
User Defined Port 1..3
User defined ports for filtering UDP and TCP
IPv4 Multicast
Block IPv4 packet types except other filters defined
IPv6 Multicast
Block IPv6 packet types except other filters defined
ARP
Filter all Ethernet packet type 806
Upstream
Applies packet filtering to traffic coming into the FEC interface
Downstream
Applies packet filtering to traffic destined to exit the FEC
interface
Port Configuration
PMP/PTP 450(i) supports access to various communication protocols and only the ports required
for these protocols are available for access by external entities. Operators may change the port
numbers for these protocols via the radio GUI or SNMP.
Table 55 Device default port numbers
Port
Usage
Port Usage
Device
21
FTP
Listen Port
AP, SM
80
HTTP
Listen Port
AP, SM
443
HTTPS
Listen Port
AP, SM
161
SNMP port
Listen Port
AP, SM
162
SNMP trap port
Destination Port
AP, SM
514
Syslog Server port
Destination Port
AP, SM
1812
Standard RADIUS port
Destination Port
AP
1813
Standard RADIUS accounting port
Destination Port
AP, SM
Page 3-39
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
Encrypting downlink broadcasts
An AP can be enabled to encrypt downlink broadcast packets such as the following:
•
ARP
•
NetBIOS
•
broadcast packets containing video data on UDP.
The encryption used is DES for a DES-configured module and AES for an AES-configured module.
Before the Encrypt Downlink Broadcast feature is enabled on the AP, air link security must be
enabled on the AP.
Isolating SMs in PMP
In an AP, SMs in the sector can be prevented from directly communicating with each other. In
CMM4, the connected APs can be prevented from directly communicating with each other, which
prevents SMs that are in different sectors of a cluster from communicating with each other.
In the AP, the SM Isolation parameter is available in the General tab of the Configuration web
page. Configure the SM Isolation feature by any of the following selections from drop-down menu:
•
Disable SM Isolation (the default selection). This allows full communication between SMs.
•
Enable Option 1 - Block SM destined packets from being forwarded. This prevents
both multicast/broadcast and unicast SM-to-SM communication.
•
Enable Option 2 - Forward SM destined packets upstream . This not only prevents
multicast/broadcast and unicast SM-to-SM communication but also sends the packets, which
otherwise may have been handled SM to SM, through the Ethernet port of the AP.
In the CMM and the CMM4, SM isolation treatment is the result of how to manage the port-based
VLAN feature of the embedded switch, where all traffic can be switched from any AP to a specified
uplink port. However, this is not packet level switching. It is not based on VLAN IDs.
Filtering management through Ethernet
Configure the SM to disallow any device that is connected to its Ethernet port from accessing the
IP address of the SM. If the Ethernet Access Control parameter is set to Enabled, then:
•
No attempt to access the SM management interface (by http, SNMP, ftp, or tftp) through
Ethernet is granted.
•
Any attempt to access the SM management interface over the air (by IP address, presuming
that LAN1 Network Interface Configuration, Network Accessibility is set to Public,
or by link from the Session Status or Remote Subscribers tab in the AP) is unaffected.
Page 3-40
Chapter 3: System planning
Security planning
Allowing management from only specified IP
addresses
The Security sub-menu of the Configuration web page in the AP/BHM and SM/BHS includes the IP
Access Control parameter. Specify one, two, or three IP addresses that must be allowed to
access the management interface (by HTTP, SNMP, FTP or TFTP).
If the selection is:
•
IP Access Filtering Disabled, then management access is allowed from any IP address, even
if the Allowed Source IP 1 to 3 parameters are populated.
•
IP Access Filtering Enabled, and specify at least one address in the Allowed Source IP 1 to 3
parameter, then management access is limited to the specified address(es).
Configuring management IP by DHCP
The Configuration > IP web page of every radio contains a LAN1 Network Interface
Configuration, DHCP State parameter that, if enabled, causes the IP configuration (IP address,
subnet mask, and gateway IP address) to be obtained through DHCP instead of the values of those
individual parameters. The setting of this DHCP state parameter is also viewable, but is not
settable, in the Network Interface tab of the Home page.
In the SM/BHS, this parameter is settable
•
in the NAT tab of the Configuration web page, but only if NAT is enabled.
•
in the IP tab of the Configuration web page, but only if the Network Accessibility parameter in
the IP tab is set to Public.
Controlling PPPoE PADI Downlink Forwarding
The AP supports the control of forwarding of PPPoE PADI (PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation)
packets. This forwarding is configured on the AP GUI Configuration > Radio page by parameter
PPPoE PADI Downlink Forwarding. When set to “Enabled”, the AP allows downstream and
upstream transmission of PPPoE PADI packets. When set to “Disabled”, the AP does NOT allow
PPPoE PADI packets to be sent out of the AP RF interface (downstream) but will allow PPPoE PADI
packets to enter the RF interface (upstream) and exit the Ethernet interface.
Page 3-41
Page 3-1
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory
information
This chapter provides end user license agreements and regulatory notifications.
Caution
Intentional or unintentional changes or modifications to the equipment must not be
made unless under the express consent of the party responsible for compliance. Any
such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment and will
void the manufacturer’s warranty.
Attention
Changements ou modifications Intentionnels ou non de l'équipement ne doivent pas
être entrepris sans l'autorisation de l’organisme responsable de la déclaration de
conformité. Ces modifications ou changements pourraient invalider le droit de
l'utilisateur à utiliser cet appareil et annuleraient la garantie du fabricant.
The following topics are described in this chapter:
•
Cambium Networks end user license agreement on page 4-2 contains the Cambium and third
party license agreements for the PMP/PTP 450(i) Series products.
•
Compliance with safety standards on page 4-22 lists the safety specifications against which the
PMP/PTP 450(i) has been tested and certified. It also describes how to keep RF exposure within
safe limits.
•
Compliance with radio regulations on page 4-28 describes how the PMP/PTP 450(i) complies
with the radio regulations that are in force in various countries, and contains notifications
made to regulatory bodies for the PMP/PTP 450(i).
Page 4-1
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Cambium Networks end user license
agreement
Definitions
In this Agreement, the word “Software” refers to the set of instructions for computers, in
executable form and in any media, (which may include diskette, CD-ROM, downloadable internet,
hardware, or firmware) licensed to you. The word “Documentation” refers to electronic or printed
manuals and accompanying instructional aids licensed to you. The word “Product” refers to
Cambium Networks’ fixed wireless broadband devices for which the Software and Documentation
is licensed for use.
Acceptance of this agreement
In connection with Cambium Networks’ delivery of certain proprietary software or products
containing embedded or pre-loaded proprietary software, or both, Cambium Networks is willing to
license this certain proprietary software and the accompanying documentation to you only on the
condition that you accept all the terms in this End User License Agreement (“Agreement”).
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THE PRODUCT OR
INSTALL THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, YOU MAY, FOR A FULL REFUND, RETURN THIS PRODUCT
TO THE LOCATION WHERE YOU ACQUIRED IT OR PROVIDE WRITTEN VERIFICATION OF
DELETION OF ALL COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE PRODUCT, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR ACCEPTANCE TO THE
TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
Grant of license
Cambium Networks Limited (“Cambium”) grants you (“Licensee” or “you”) a personal,
nonexclusive, non-transferable license to use the Software and Documentation subject to the
Conditions of Use set forth in “Conditions of use” and the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any terms or conditions relating to the Software and Documentation appearing on
the face or reverse side of any purchase order, purchase order acknowledgment or other order
document that are different from, or in addition to, the terms of this Agreement will not be binding
on the parties, even if payment is accepted.
Page 4-2
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Conditions of use
Any use of the Software and Documentation outside of the conditions set forth in this Agreement
is strictly prohibited and will be deemed a breach of this Agreement.
1. Only you, your employees or agents may use the Software and Documentation. You will take all
necessary steps to insure that your employees and agents abide by the terms of this Agreement.
2. You will use the Software and Documentation (i) only for your internal business purposes; (ii)
only as described in the Software and Documentation; and (iii) in strict accordance with this
Agreement.
3. You may use the Software and Documentation, provided that the use is in conformance with the
terms set forth in this Agreement.
4. Portions of the Software and Documentation are protected by United States copyright laws,
international treaty provisions, and other applicable laws. Therefore, you must treat the Software
like any other copyrighted material (for example, a book or musical recording) except that you may
either: (i) make 1 copy of the transportable part of the Software (which typically is supplied on
diskette, CD-ROM, or downloadable internet), solely for back-up purposes; or (ii) copy the
transportable part of the Software to a PC hard disk, provided you keep the original solely for backup purposes. If the Documentation is in printed form, it may not be copied. If the Documentation
is in electronic form, you may print out 1 copy, which then may not be copied. With regard to the
copy made for backup or archival purposes, you agree to reproduce any Cambium Networks
copyright notice, and other proprietary legends appearing thereon. Such copyright notice(s) may
appear in any of several forms, including machine-readable form, and you agree to reproduce
such notice in each form in which it appears, to the extent it is physically possible to do so.
Unauthorized duplication of the Software or Documentation constitutes copyright infringement,
and in the United States is punishable in federal court by fine and imprisonment.
5. You will not transfer, directly or indirectly, any product, technical data or software to any
country for which the United States Government requires an export license or other governmental
approval without first obtaining such license or approval.
Page 4-3
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Title and restrictions
If you transfer possession of any copy of the Software and Documentation to another party outside
of the terms of this agreement, your license is automatically terminated. Title and copyrights to the
Software and Documentation and any copies made by you remain with Cambium Networks and its
licensors. You will not, and will not permit others to: (i) modify, translate, decompile, bootleg,
reverse engineer, disassemble, or extract the inner workings of the Software or Documentation,
(ii) copy the look-and-feel or functionality of the Software or Documentation; (iii) remove any
proprietary notices, marks, labels, or logos from the Software or Documentation; (iv) rent or
transfer all or some of the Software or Documentation to any other party without Cambium’s prior
written consent; or (v) utilize any computer software or hardware which is designed to defeat any
copy protection device, should the Software and Documentation be equipped with such a
protection device. If the Software and Documentation is provided on multiple types of media (such
as diskette, CD-ROM, downloadable internet), then you will only use the medium which best meets
your specific needs, and will not loan, rent, lease, or transfer the other media contained in the
package without Cambium’s written consent. Unauthorized copying of the Software or
Documentation, or failure to comply with any of the provisions of this Agreement, will result in
automatic termination of this license.
Confidentiality
You acknowledge that all Software and Documentation contain valuable proprietary information
and trade secrets and that unauthorized or improper use of the Software and Documentation will
result in irreparable harm to Cambium Networks for which monetary damages would be
inadequate and for which Cambium Networks will be entitled to immediate injunctive relief. If
applicable, you will limit access to the Software and Documentation to those of your employees
and agents who need to use the Software and Documentation for your internal business purposes,
and you will take appropriate action with those employees and agents to preserve the
confidentiality of the Software and Documentation, using the same degree of care to avoid
unauthorized or improper disclosure as you use for the protection of your own proprietary
software, but in no event less than reasonable care.
You have no obligation to preserve the confidentiality of any proprietary information that: (i) was
in the public domain at the time of disclosure; (ii) entered the public domain through no fault of
yours; (iii) was given to you free of any obligation to keep it confidential; (iv) is independently
developed by you; or (v) is disclosed as required by law provided that you notify Cambium
Networks prior to such disclosure and provide Cambium Networks with a reasonable opportunity
to respond.
Page 4-4
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Right to use Cambium’s name
Except as required in “Conditions of use”, you will not, during the term of this Agreement or
thereafter, use any trademark of Cambium Networks, or any word or symbol likely to be confused
with any Cambium Networks trademark, either alone or in any combination with another word or
words.
Transfer
The Software and Documentation may not be transferred to another party without the express
written consent of Cambium Networks, regardless of whether or not such transfer is accomplished
by physical or electronic means. Cambium’s consent may be withheld at its discretion and may be
conditioned upon transferee paying all applicable license fees and agreeing to be bound by this
Agreement.
Updates
During the first 12 months after purchase of a Product, or during the term of any executed
Maintenance and Support Agreement for the Product, you are entitled to receive Updates. An
“Update” means any code in any form which is a bug fix, patch, error correction, or minor
enhancement, but excludes any major feature added to the Software. Updates are available for
download at the support website.
Major features may be available from time to time for an additional license fee. If Cambium
Networks makes available to you major features and no other end user license agreement is
provided, then the terms of this Agreement will apply.
Maintenance
Except as provided above, Cambium Networks is not responsible for maintenance or field service
of the Software under this Agreement.
Page 4-5
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Disclaimer
CAMBIUM NETWORKS DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED, STATUTORY, OR IN ANY COMMUNICATION WITH YOU. CAMBIUM NETWORKS
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILTY, NONINFRINGEMENT, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE
SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED “AS IS.” CAMBIUM NETWORKS DOES NOT
WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT THE OPERATION
OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE
SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. CAMBIUM NETWORKS MAKES NO WARRANTY WITH
RESPECT TO THE CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, OR RELIABILITY OF THE SOFTWARE AND
DOCUMENTATION. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so the
above exclusion may not apply to you.
Limitation of liability
IN NO EVENT SHALL CAMBIUM NETWORKS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PARTY FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY OR OTHER
DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS, OR
FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY, EVEN IF CAMBIUM NETWORKS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. (Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion or limitation may not apply to you.)
IN NO CASE SHALL CAMBIUM’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT.
U.S. government
If you are acquiring the Product on behalf of any unit or agency of the U.S. Government, the
following applies. Use, duplication, or disclosure of the Software and Documentation is subject to
the restrictions set forth in subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software –
Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19 (JUNE 1987), if applicable, unless being provided to the
Department of Defense. If being provided to the Department of Defense, use, duplication, or
disclosure of the Products is subject to the restricted rights set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of
the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT 1988), if
applicable. Software and Documentation may or may not include a Restricted Rights notice, or
other notice referring specifically to the terms and conditions of this Agreement. The terms and
conditions of this Agreement will each continue to apply, but only to the extent that such terms
and conditions are not inconsistent with the rights provided to you under the aforementioned
provisions of the FAR and DFARS, as applicable to the particular procuring agency and
procurement transaction.
Page 4-6
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Term of license
Your right to use the Software will continue in perpetuity unless terminated as follows. Your right
to use the Software will terminate immediately without notice upon a breach of this Agreement by
you. Within 30 days after termination of this Agreement, you will certify to Cambium Networks in
writing that through your best efforts, and to the best of your knowledge, the original and all
copies, in whole or in part, in any form, of the Software and all related material and
Documentation, have been destroyed, except that, with prior written consent from Cambium
Networks, you may retain one copy for archival or backup purposes. You may not sublicense,
assign or transfer the license or the Product, except as expressly provided in this Agreement. Any
attempt to otherwise sublicense, assign or transfer any of the rights, duties or obligations
hereunder is null and void.
Governing law
This Agreement is governed by the laws of the United States of America to the extent that they
apply and otherwise by the laws of the State of Illinois.
Assignment
This agreement may not be assigned by you without Cambium’s prior written consent.
Survival of provisions
The parties agree that where the context of any provision indicates an intent that it survives the
term of this Agreement, then it will survive.
Entire agreement
This agreement contains the parties’ entire agreement regarding your use of the Software and
may be amended only in writing signed by both parties, except that Cambium Networks may
modify this Agreement as necessary to comply with applicable laws.
Third party software
The software may contain one or more items of Third-Party Software supplied by other third-party
suppliers. The terms of this Agreement govern your use of any Third-Party Software UNLESS A
SEPARATE THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE LICENSE IS INCLUDED, IN WHICH CASE YOUR USE OF THE
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE WILL THEN BE GOVERNED BY THE SEPARATE THIRD-PARTY LICENSE.
Page 4-7
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Net SNMP
Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate parts below. Please make sure
that you read all the parts.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) ----Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any
purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all
copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be
used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written
permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES
WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR
PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright © 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
•
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
•
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
•
Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors
may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
Page 4-8
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS”
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) ----Portions of this code are copyright © 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
•
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
•
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
•
The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara,
California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
Page 4-9
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
•
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
•
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
•
Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS”
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright © 2003-2008, Sparta, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
•
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
•
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
•
Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS”
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright © 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network
Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.
Page 4-10
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
•
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
•
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
•
Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the
names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS”
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) ----Copyright © Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003
oss@fabasoft.com
Author: Bernhard Penz
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
•
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
•
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
•
The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries, brand or
product names may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
Page 4-11
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
OpenSSL
Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission,
please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear
in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Page 4-12
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This
product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The
implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are
adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4,
RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this
distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be
removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the
parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not
cryptographic related.
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory
(application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Page 4-13
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
The license and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code
cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution
license [including the GNU Public License.]
Zlib
Copyright © 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the
authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the
original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as
being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly jloup@gzip.org
Mark Adler madler@alumni.caltech.edu
Libpng
libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.2.35, February 14, 2009, are Copyright © 2004,
2006-2008 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-1.2.5 with the following individual added to the list of Contributing Authors
Cosmin Truta
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 - October 3, 2002, are Copyright © 2000-2002
Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as
libpng-1.0.6 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against
infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfil any of your particular
purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality,
performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright © 1998, 1999
Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as
libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Page 4-14
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Willem van Schaik
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright © 1996, 1997 Andreas
Dilger
Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright © 1995, 1996 Guy Eric
Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
For the purposes of this copyright and license, “Contributing Authors” is defined as the following
set of individuals:
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied “AS IS”. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of
merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages,
which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of
such damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or portions
hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented.
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the
original source.
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source
distribution.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the
use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products.
If you use this source code in a product, acknowledgment is not required but would be
appreciated.
A “png_get_copyright” function is available, for convenient use in “about” boxes and the like:
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and "pngbar.jpg
(88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31).
Page 4-15
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of
the Open Source Initiative.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
glennrp at users.sourceforge.net
February 14, 2009
Bzip2
This program, "bzip2", the associated library "libbzip2", and all documentation, are copyright (C)
1996-2007 Julian R Seward. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
2. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the
original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
3. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as
being the original software.
4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
Julian Seward, jseward@bzip.org
USB library functions
Atmel Corporation
2325 Orchard Parkway
San Jose, Ca 95131
Copyright (c) 2004 Atmel
Page 4-16
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
Apache
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction,
and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by
the copyright owner that is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all
other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common
control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition,
"control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the
direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the
outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity
exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications,
including but not limited to software source code, documentation
source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical
transformation or translation of a Source form, including but
not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation,
and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or
Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a
copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work
(an example is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object
form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the
editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes
of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of,
the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including
the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions
to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally
submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner
or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of
the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted"
Page 4-17
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent
to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to
communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems,
and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the
Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but
excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise
designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity
on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and
subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of,
publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the
Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
(except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made,
use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work,
where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable
by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s)
with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You
institute patent litigation against any entity (including a
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work
or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct
or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses
granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate
as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the
Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without
modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You
meet the following conditions:
(a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or
Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices
stating that You changed the files; and
(c) You must retain, in the Source form
that You distribute, all copyright,
attribution notices from the Source
excluding those notices that do not
the Derivative Works; and
of any Derivative Works
patent, trademark, and
form of the Work,
pertain to any part of
(d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its
distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must
include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained
within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not
pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one
Page 4-18
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed
as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or
documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or,
within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and
wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents
of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and
do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution
notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside
or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided
that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed
as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and
may provide additional or different license terms and conditions
for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or
for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use,
reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with
the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise,
any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work
by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of
this License, without any additional terms or conditions.
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify
the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed
with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade
names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor,
except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the
origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or
agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or
implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions
of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the
appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any
risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory,
whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise,
unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly
negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be
liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special,
incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a
result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the
Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill,
work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all
other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor
has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing
the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer,
and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity,
Page 4-19
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this
License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only
on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf
of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify,
defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability
incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason
of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following
boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets "[]"
replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include
the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate
comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a
file or class name and description of purpose be included on the
same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier
identification within third-party archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License");
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
limitations under the License.
Page 4-20
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Cambium Networks end user license agreement
D3 JS library
Copyright (c) 2013, Michael Bostock
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name Michael Bostock may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL MICHAEL BOSTOCK BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE
Page 4-21
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with safety standards
Compliance with safety standards
This section lists the safety specifications against which the PMP/PTP 450(i) has been tested and
certified. It also describes how to keep RF exposure within safe limits.
Electrical safety compliance
The PMP/PTP 450(i) hardware has been tested for compliance to the electrical safety specifications
listed in Table 56.
Table 56 PMP 450(i) safety compliance specifications
Region
Specification
USA
UL 60950
Canada
CSA C22.2 No.60950
International
CB certified & certificate to IEC 60950
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliance
The EMC specification type approvals that have been granted for PMP/PTP 450(i) are listed under
Table 57.
Table 57 EMC emissions compliance
Region
Specification
USA
FCC Part 15 Class B
Canada
RSS Gen and RSS-247 ISS1
International
EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2
EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1
Human exposure to radio frequency energy
Relevant standards (USA and EC) applicable when working with RF equipment are:
•
ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to
Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz.
•
Council recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general public to
electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz) (1999/519/EC) and respective national regulations.
Page 4-22
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with safety standards
•
Directive 2004/40/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 29 April 2004 on the
minimum health and safety requirements regarding the exposure of workers to the risks
arising from physical agents (electromagnetic fields) (18th individual Directive within the
meaning of Article 16(1) of Directive 89/391/EEC).
•
US FCC limits for the general population. See the FCC web site at http://www.fcc.gov, and the
policies, guidelines, and requirements in Part 1 of Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations,
as well as the guidelines and suggestions for evaluating compliance in FCC OET Bulletin 65.
•
Health Canada limits for the general population. See the Health Canada web site at
http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/ewh-semt/pubs/radiation/99ehd-dhm237/limits-limites_e.html and
Safety Code 6.
•
EN 50383:2002 to 2010 Basic standard for the calculation and measurement of electromagnetic
field strength and SAR related to human exposure from radio base stations and fixed terminal
stations for wireless telecommunication systems (110 MHz - 40 GHz).
•
BS EN 50385:2002 Product standard to demonstrate the compliances of radio base stations and
fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems with the basic restrictions or
the reference levels related to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields (110
MHz – 40 GHz) – general public.
•
ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) guidelines for the
general public. See the ICNIRP web site at http://www.icnirp.de/ and Guidelines for Limiting
Exposure to Time-Varying Electric, Magnetic, and Electromagnetic Fields.
Power density exposure limit
Install the radios for the PMP/PTP 450(i) family of wireless solutions so as to provide and maintain
the minimum separation distances from all persons.
The applicable power density exposure limit for RF energy in the 4.9, 5.4 and 5.8 GHz frequency
bands is 10 W /m 2 . The applicable power density exposure limit for RF energy in the 900 MHz
frequency band is 6 W /m 2. For more information, see Human exposure to radio frequency energy
on page 4-22.
Page 4-23
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with safety standards
Calculation of power density
The following calculation is based on the ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991 method, as that provides a worst
case analysis. Details of the assessment to EN50383:2002 can be provided, if required.
Peak power density in the far field of a radio frequency point source is calculated as follows:
S=
P .G
4π d 2
W here:
Is:
power density in W/m2
maximum average transmit power
capability of the radio, in W
total Tx gain as a factor, converted
from dB
distance from point source, in m
Rearranging terms to solve for distance yields:
d=
P.G
4π .S
Calculated distances and power compliance margins
Table 59 and Table 60 shows calculated minimum separation distances, recommended distances
and resulting margins for each frequency band and antenna combination for the USA and Canada.
These are conservative distances that include compliance margins. At these and greater separation
distances, the power density from the RF field is below generally accepted limits for the general
population.
PMP 450(i) equipment adheres to all applicable EIRP limits for transmit power when operating in
MIMO mode. Separation distances and compliance margins include compensation for both
transmitters.
Explanation of terms used in Table 59 and Table 60:
P burst – maximum average transmit power during transmit burst (Watt)
P – maximum average transmit power of the radio (Watt)
G – total transmit gain as a factor, converted from dB
S – power density (Watt/m2)
d – minimum safe separation distance from point source (meters)
Page 4-24
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with safety standards
Table 58 FCC minimum safe distances – 900 MHz
Band
900
MHz
(W )
(dBi)
(W /
m 2)
(m )
Sector antenna
0.19
22.75 (13 dBi)
0.27
Yagi antenna (AP)
0.24
23.82 (12 dBi)
0.28
Yagi antenna (SM)
0.24
23.89 (12 dBi)
0.28
Antenna
burst
(W )
Table 59 FCC minimum safe distances – 4.9 GHz and 5.8 GHz
Band
4.9
GHz
5.1
GHz
5.8
GHz
Antenna
burst
(W )
(W )
(dBi)
(W /
m 2)
(m )
Omni-directional
0.25
0.21
20.0 (13 dBi)
10.0
0.17
90° sector antenna
0.25
0.21
50.0 (17 dBi)
10.0
0.26
2ft directional flat plate
0.25
0.21
631.0 (28 dBi)
10.0
0.93
4ft directional parabolic
0.10
0.85
2344.0 (34.9 dBi)
10.0
1.14
6ft directional parabolic
0.04
0.03
5248.0 (37.2 dBi)
10.0
1.07
Omni-directional
0.1700
0.2000
20.0 (10 dBi)
10.0
0.15
90° sector
0.0339
0.0398
50.0 (17 dBi)
10.0
0.10
2ft directional flat plate
0.0017
0.0020
708.0 (28.5 dBi)
10.0
0.09
4ft directional parabolic
0.1070
0.0126
3388.0 (35.3 dBi)
10.0
0.44
Omni-directional
0.28
0.24
20.0 (13 dBi)
10.0
0.18
90° sector
0.12
0.10
50.0 (17 dBi)
10.0
0.18
2ft directional flat plate
0.63
0.54
708.0 (28.5 dBi)
10.0
1.57
4ft directional parabolic
0.63
0.54
3388.0 (35.3 dBi)
10.0
3.43
6ft directional parabolic
0.63
0.54
6457.0 (38.1 dBi)
10.0
4.74
Table 60 IC minimum safe distances – 4.9 GHz and 5.8 GHz
Band
Antenna
burst
(W )
(W )
(dBi)
(W /
m 2)
(m )
4.9
Omni-directional
0.25
0.17
20.0 (13 dBi)
10.0
0.17
Page 4-25
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
GHz
5.8
GHz
Compliance with safety standards
90° sector
0.25
0.17
50.1 (17 dBi)
10.0
0.26
2ft directional flat plate
0.25
0.17
631.0 (28 dBi)
10.0
0.93
6ft directional parabolic
0.17
0.11
5248.0 (37.2 dBi)
10.0
2.19
Omni-directional
0.28
0.19
20.0 (13 dBi)
10.0
0.18
90° sector
0.12
0.08
50.1 (17 dBi)
10.0
0.18
2ft directional flat plate
0.63
0.44
707.9 (28.5 dBi)
10.0
1.57
4ft directional parabolic
0.63
0.44
3388.4 (35.3 dBi)
10.0
3.43
(*1) P: maximum average transmit power capability of the radio including cable loss (Watt)
Capacité de puissance d'émission moyenne maximale de la radio comprenant la perte dans
les câble de connexion (W)
(*2) G: total transmit gain as a factor, converted from dB
Gain total d'émission, converti à partir de la valeur en dB
(*3) S: power density (W/m2)
Densité de puissance (W/m2)
(*4) d: minimum distance from point source (meters)
Distance minimale de source ponctuelle (en mètres)
Page 4-26
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with safety standards
Note
Gain of antenna in dBi = 10 * log(G).
The regulations require that the power used for the calculations is the maximum
power in the transmit burst subject to allowance for source-based time-averaging.
At 5.4 GHz and EU 5.8 GHz, the products are generally limited to a fixed EIRP which
can be achieved with the Integrated Antenna. The calculations above assume that the
maximum EIRP allowed by the regulations is being transmitted.
Remarque
Gain de l'antenne en dBi = 10 * log(G).
Les règlements exigent que la puissance utilisée pour les calculs soit la puissance
maximale de la rafale de transmission soumis à une réduction pour prendre en
compte le rapport cyclique pour les signaux modulés dans le temps.
Pour une opération dans la CEE dans les bandes 5,4 GHz et 5,8 GHz, les produits sont
généralement limités à une PIRE qui peut être atteinte avec l'antenne intégrée. Les
calculs ci-dessus supposent que la PIRE maximale autorisée par la réglementation est
atteinte.
Note
If there are no EIRP limits in the country of deployment, use the distance calculations
for FCC 5.8 GHz for all frequency bands.
At FCC 5.8 GHz, for antennas between 0.6m (2ft) and 1.8m (6ft), alter the distance
proportionally to the antenna gain.
Remarque
Si aucune limite de PIRE existe pour le pays de déploiement, utilisez les calculs de
distance pour FCC 5,8 GHz pour toutes les bandes de fréquence.
Pour la band FCC 5,8 GHz et les antennes entre 0,6 m (2 pieds) et 1,8 m (6 pieds),
modifier la distance proportionnellement au gain de l'antenne.
Page 4-27
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with radio regulations
Compliance with radio regulations
This section describes how the PMP/PTP 450(i) complies with the radio regulations that are in force
in various countries.
Caution
Where necessary, the end user is responsible for obtaining any National licenses
required to operate this product and these must be obtained before using the product
in any particular country. Contact the appropriate national administrations for details
of the conditions of use for the bands in question and any exceptions that might
apply.
Caution
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Cambium Networks could void
the user’s authority to operate the system.
Caution
For the connectorized version of the product and in order to reduce potential radio
interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the
Effective Isotropically Radiated Power (EIRP) is not more than that permitted for
successful communication.
Attention
Le cas échéant, l'utilisateur final est responsable de l'obtention des licences nationales
nécessaires pour faire fonctionner ce produit. Celles-ci doivent être obtenus avant
d'utiliser le produit dans un pays particulier. Contactez les administrations nationales
concernées pour les détails des conditions d'utilisation des bandes en question, et
toutes les exceptions qui pourraient s'appliquer
Attention
Les changements ou modifications non expressément approuvés par les réseaux de
Cambium pourraient annuler l'autorité de l'utilisateur à faire fonctionner le système.
Attention
Pour la version du produit avec une antenne externe, et afin de réduire le risque
d'interférence avec d'autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne et son gain doivent être
choisis afin que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (PIRE) ne soit pas
supérieure au minimum nécessaire pour établir une liaison de la qualité requise.
Page 4-28
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with radio regulations
Type approvals
This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world. This means that
the system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply. The
frequency bands in which the system operates may be ‘unlicensed’ and, in these bands, the
system can be used provided it does not cause interference. The system is not guaranteed
protection against interference from other products and installations.
The radio specification type approvals that have been granted for PMP 450i frequency variants are
listed under Table 61.
Table 61 Radio certifications
Region/Country
Band
Specification
Brazil
4.9 GHz
ANATEL, RESOLUÇÃO Nº 633, DE 14 DE MARÇO DE 2014
5.4 GHz
ANATEL, RESOLUTION No. 506, FROM JULY 1, 2008
5.8 GHz
ANATEL, RESOLUTION No. 506, FROM JULY 1, 2008
4.9 GHz
Protocol Between the UNITED STATES OF AMERICA and
MEXICO – Use of 4940 to 4990 MHz band.
5.4 GHz
Acuerdo del 27 de noviembre de 2012
5.8 GHz
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
4.9 GHz
FCC 47 CFR Part 90
5.1 GHz
FCC 47 CFR Part 15 E
5.8 GHz
FCC 47 CFR Part 15 C
4.9 GHz
IC RSS-111, Issue 5
5.8 GHz
IC RSS-111, Issue 5
4.9 GHz
ETSI EN302 625; V1.1.1 Broadband Disaster Relief
Mexico
USA
Canada (Pending)
Europe
Brazil specific information
Brazil notification
For compliant operation in the 5.4 GHz band, the Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power from the
integrated antenna or connectorized antenna shall not exceed 27 dBm (0.5 W).
The operator is responsible for enabling the DFS feature on any Canopy 5.4 GHz radio by setting
the Country Code to “Brazil”, including after the module is reset to factory defaults.
Important Note: This equipment operates as a secondary application, so it has no rights against
harmful interference, even if generated by similar equipment, and cannot cause harmful
interference on systems operating as primary applications.
Page 4-29
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with radio regulations
Brazil certification numbers
The Anatel certification number for Brazil for the PMP/PTP 450i is 2426-15-7745.
Australia Notification
17
900 MHz modules must be set to transmit and receive only on center channels of 920, 922, or 923
MHz so as to stay within the ACMA approved band of 915 MHz to 928 MHz for the class license and
not interfere with other approved users.
After taking into account antenna gain (in dBi), 900 MHz modules’ transmitter output power (in
dBm) must be set to stay within the legal regulatory limit of 30 dBm (1 W) EIRP for this 900 MHz
frequency band.
Regulatory Requirements for CEPT Member States
(www.cept.org)
When operated in accordance with the instructions for use, Cambium Wireless equipment
operating in the 5.1 GHz and 5.4 GHz bands is compliant with CEPT Resolution 229 (REV. WRC-12).
Operating the PMP/PTP 450(i) in the bands 5150 to 5350 MHz and 5470 to 5725 MHz is granted
providing it is not causing interference to the existing primary services allocated to those bands.
For compliant operation in the 5250 to 5350 MHz band, the transmit power from the integrated
antenna or a connectorized antenna shall be limited to a maximum mean EIRP of 200 mW and a
maximum mean EIRP density of 10 mW/MHz in any 1 MHz band.
For compliant operation in the 5470 to 5725 MHz band, the transmit power shall be restricted to a
maximum of 250 mW with a maximum mean EIRP of 1 W and a maximum mean EIRP density of
50 mW/MHz in any 1 MHz band.
For compliant operation in the bands 5 250-5 350 MHz and 5 470-5 725 MHz, the PMP/PTP 450(i)
employs transmitter power control.
For EU member states, RLAN equipment in the 5.4GHz bands is exempt from individual licensing
under Commission Recommendation 2003/203/EC. Contact the appropriate national
administrations for details on the conditions of use for the bands in question and any exceptions
that might apply. Also see www.ero.dk for further information.
Cambium Radio equipment operating in the 5470 to 5725 MHz band are categorized as “Class 1”
devices within the EU in accordance with ECC DEC(04)08 and are “CE” marked
to show compliance with the European Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment
(R&TTE) directive 1999/5/EC. The relevant Declaration of Conformity can be found at
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/ec_doc/ .
17
900 MHz support planned for future release.
Page 4-30
Chapter 4: Legal and regulatory information
Compliance with radio regulations
A European Commission decision, implemented by Member States on 31 October 2005, makes the
frequency band 5470-5725 MHz available in all EU Member States for wireless access systems.
Under this decision, the designation of Canopy 5.4GHz products become “Class 1 devices” and
these do not require notification under article 6, section 4 of the R&TTE Directive. Consequently,
these 5.4GHz products are only marked with the
any member state.
Page 4-31
symbol and may be used in
Chapter 5:
Preparing for installation
This chapter describes how to stage and test the hardware for a PMP 450(i) network. This chapter
is arranged as follows:
•
Safety on page 5-2: Describes the precautions to be observed and checks to be performed
before proceeding with the installation
•
Preparing for installation on page 5-5: Describes the pre-configuration procedure before
proceed with installation.
•
Testing system components on page 5-7: Describes the procedures for unpacking and
performing and initial staging of the PMP/PTP 450(i) equipment
•
Configuring Link for Test on page 5-15: Describes the procedures for testing the equipment’s
radio links.
Page 5-1
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Safety
Safety
W arning
To prevent loss of life or physical injury, observe the following safety guidelines. In no
event shall Cambium Networks be liable for any injury or damage caused during the
installation of the Cambium PMP/PTP 450(i). Ensure that only qualified personnel
install a PMP/PTP 450(i) link.
Power lines
Exercise extreme care when working near power lines.
Working at heights
Exercise extreme care when working at heights.
Power supply
Always use one of the Cambium PMP/PTP 450(i) Series power supply units (PSU) to power the
ODU. Failure to use a Cambium supplied PoE could result in equipment damage and will invalidate
the safety certification and may cause a safety hazard.
Grounding and protective earth
The Outdoor Unit (ODU) must be properly grounded to protect against lightning. It is the user’s
responsibility to install the equipment in accordance with national regulations. In the USA follow
the requirements of the National Electrical code NFPA 70-2005 and 780-2004 Installation of
Lightning Protection Systems. In Canada, follow Section 54 of the Canadian Electrical Code. These
codes describe correct installation procedures for grounding the outdoor unit, mast, lead-in wire
and discharge unit, size of grounding conductors and connection requirements for grounding
electrodes. Other regulations may apply in different countries and therefore it is recommended
that installation of the outdoor unit be contracted to a professional installer.
Powering down before servicing
Always power down and unplug the equipment before servicing.
Page 5-2
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Safety
Primary disconnect device
The ODU power supply is the primary disconnect device.
External cables
Safety may be compromised if outdoor rated cables are not used for connections that will be
exposed to the outdoor environment. For outdoor copper Cat5e Ethernet interfaces, always use
Cat5e cable that is gel-filled and shielded with copper-plated steel.
RF exposure near the antenna
Strong radio frequency (RF) fields will be present close to the antenna when the transmitter is on.
Always turn off the power to the ODU before undertaking maintenance activities in front of the
antenna.
Minimum separation distances
Ensure that personnel are not exposed to unsafe levels of RF energy. The units start to radiate RF
energy as soon as they are powered up. Never work in front of the antenna when the ODU is
powered. Install the ODUs so as to provide and maintain the minimum separation distances from
all persons. For minimum separation distances, see Calculated distances and power compliance
margins on page 4-24.
Grounding and lightning protection requirements
Ensure that the installation meets the requirements defined in Grounding and lightning protection
on page 3-8.
Grounding cable installation methods
To provide effective protection against lightning induced surges, observe these requirements:
•
Grounding conductor runs are as short, straight and smooth as possible, with bends and
curves kept to a minimum.
•
Grounding cables must not be installed with drip loops.
•
All bends must have a minimum radius of 200 mm (8 in) and a minimum angle of 90°. A
diagonal run is preferable to a bend, even though it does not follow the contour or run parallel
to the supporting structure.
•
All bends, curves and connections must be routed towards the grounding electrode system,
ground rod, or ground bar.
Page 5-3
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Safety
•
Grounding conductors must be securely fastened.
•
Braided grounding conductors must not be used.
•
Approved bonding techniques must be used for the connection of dissimilar metals.
Siting ODUs and antennas
ODUs, external antennas and GPS receivers are not designed to survive direct lightning strikes. For
this reason they must be installed in Zone B as defined in Lightning protection zones on page 3-9.
Mounting in Zone A may put equipment, structures and life at risk.
Thermal Safety
The ODU enclosure may be hot to the touch when in operation. The ODU must not be operated in
ambient temperatures exceeding 40°C unless mounted in a Restricted Access Location. For more
information, see ODU ambient temperature limits on page 3-10.
W arning
Do not install the ODU in a location where the ambient temperature could exceed 40°C
unless this is a Restricted Access Location as defined by EN 60950-1.
Alerte
L’unité externe ne doit pas être installée dans un endroit où la température ambiante
est supérieure à 40C à moins que l’accès soit limité au personnel autorisé.
Page 5-4
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Preparing for installation
Preparing for installation
ODU pre-configuration
It is common practice to pre-configure the units during staging before site installation by
performing the following tasks:
•
Error! Reference source not found.
•
Error! Reference source not found.
•
Error! Reference source not found.
•
Error! Reference source not found.
•
Error! Reference source not found.
•
Error! Reference source not found.
•
Error! Reference source not found.
•
Error! Reference source not found.
•
Error! Reference source not found.
•
Error! Reference source not found.
•
Error! Reference source not found.
•
Error! Reference source not found.
•
Error! Reference source not found.
•
Error! Reference source not found.
If the units are to be pre-configured during staging, the safety precautions below MUST be
observed.
Preparing personnel
In no event shall Cambium Networks be liable for any injury or damage caused during the
installation of the Cambium PMP/PTP 450(i) equipment.
Ensure that only qualified personnel undertake the installation of a PMP/PTP 450(i) system.
Ensure that all safety precautions are observed.
Preparing inventory
Perform the following inventory checks:
•
Check that the correct components are available, as described in Ordering the components on
page 2-42.
•
Check the contents of all packages against their packing lists.
Page 5-5
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Preparing for installation
Preparing tools
Check that following specific tools are available, in addition to general tools:
•
RJ45 crimp tool (it must be the correct tool for the type of RJ45 being used).
•
Personal Computer (PC) with 10 or 100 or 1000 BaseT Ethernet port
•
Internet Explorer or Firefox
•
Ethernet patch cables
Page 5-6
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Testing system components
Testing system components
The best practice is to connect all components—AP/BHM, SMs/BHS, GPS antenna (if applicable)
and CMM (if applicable)—in a test setting and initially configure and verify them before deploying
them to an installation. In this way, any configuration issues are worked out before going on-site,
on a tower, in the weather, where the discovery of configuration issues or marginal hardware is
more problematic and work-flow affecting.
Unpacking Components
When a delivery arrives, inspect all packages immediately for damages.
Carefully unpack the equipment, verify that all the components have arrived as per order and are
in good condition. Save all packaging materials for equipment transportation to the installation
site.
Preparing the ODU
After the equipment is unpacked, the units may be configured for staging tests.
Use either of two methods to configure an AP/BHM:
•
Use the Quick Start feature of the product (via GUI menu Quick Start)
•
Manually set each parameter
After changing configuration parameters on a GUI web page:
•
Before you leave a web page, click the Save button to save the change(s)
•
After making change(s) on multiple web pages, click the Reboot button to reboot the module
and implement the change(s)
Configuring the Computing Device for Test
If the computer is configured for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), disconnect the
computer from the network. If the computer is instead configured for static IP addressing
•
Set the static address in the 169.254 network
•
Set the subnet mask to 255.255.0.0.
For detailed instructions, see section Configuring the management PC on page 5-15.
Page 5-7
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Testing system components
Factory default Configuration
From the factory, the APs/BHMs and SMs/BHSs are all configured to not transmit on any
frequency. This configuration ensures that equipment operators do not accidentally turn on an
unsynchronized module. Site synchronization of modules is required because
•
•
modules:
cannot transmit and receive signals at the same time.
use TDD (Time Division Duplexing) to distribute signal access of the downlink and uplink
frames.
when one module transmits while an unintended module nearby receives signal, the
transmitting module may interfere with or desense the receiving module. In this context,
interference is self-interference (within the same network).
ODU interfaces
See section PMP/PTP 450(i) interfaces on page 2-7
ODU diagnostic LEDs
See section AP/BHM LEDs on page 2-11.
See section SM/BHS LEDs on page 2-12.
Recommended Tools for Installation
The following tools may be needed for installation:
Table 62 Tools for PMP and PTP 450(i) equipment installation
Equipment to Be
Installed
Tools Required
AP or BHM
•
3 mm Allen Wrench
Used for connecting the antenna mating bracket to the rear of the AP
housing
•
Crescent Wrench Pair
Used for tightening cable glands
•
Self-amalgamating and PVC Tape
Used for weatherproofing N-type connections
Page 5-8
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Equipment to Be
Installed
Tools Required
AP or BHM or BHS
Antenna
•
Testing system components
13 mm Spanner Wrench (or Ratchet Spanner Wrench) Pair
Used for connecting the antenna (sector or omni for AP, or directional for
BH)base to the pole/mast mounting bracket
•
Self-amalgamating and PVC Tape
Used for weatherproofing N-type connections
•
N-type Torque Wrench (not required but recommended)
Used for assuring proper tightening of N-type connectors terminating the
RF cables
SM
•
Wrench/driver (depending on operator’s choice of clamps)
Used for tightening clamps to the pole
•
Alignment tone adapter / headset
Used for aligning the SM to the AP
Universal Global
Positioning System
•
Philips Screwdriver
Used for attaching the UGPS unit to the pole/mast mounting bracket
•
13mm Spanner Wrench (or Ratchet Spanner Wrench)
Used for connecting the mounting bracket’s U-bolt to the antenna or mast
Cabling
•
Electrician’s Scissors or Wire Cutters
Used for cutting wire to length
•
RJ-11/RJ-45 Crimping Tool
Used for stripping RJ-11/RJ-45 cables and for terminating cable ends
•
Cable Testing Device
Used to ensure that cables are properly constructed
Standards for Wiring
Modules automatically sense whether the Ethernet cable in a connection is wired as straightthrough or crossover. Operators may use either straight-through or crossover cable to connect a
network interface card (NIC), hub, router, or switch to these modules. For a straight-through cable,
use the EIA/TIA-568B wire color-code standard on both ends. For a crossover cable, use the
EIA/TIA-568B wire color-code standard on one end, and the EIA/TIA-568A wire color-code standard
on the other end.
Page 5-9
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Testing system components
Best Practices for Cabling
The following practices are essential to the reliability and longevity of cabled connections:
•
Use only shielded cables to resist interference.
•
For vertical runs, provide cable support and strain relief.
•
Include a 2-ft (0.6-m) service loop on each end of the cable to allow for thermal expansion and
contraction and to facilitate terminating the cable again when needed.
•
Include a drip loop to shed water so that most of the water does not reach the connector at the
device.
•
Properly crimp all connectors.
•
Use dielectric grease on all connectors to resist corrosion.
•
Use only shielded connectors to resist interference and corrosion.
Wiring Connectors
The following diagrams correlate pins to wire colors and illustrate crossovers where applicable.
Pin 1, relative to the lock tab on the connector of a straight-through cable is located as shown
below.
Figure 32 Pin 1 location
Page 5-10
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Testing system components
Main port pinout
Table 63 Main port pinout
RJ45 pin
Description
+TxRx0
–TxRx0
+TxRx1
+TxRx2
–TxRx2
–TxRx1
+TxRx3
–TxRx3
Aux port pinout
Table 64 Aux port pinout
RJ45 pin
Description
+TxRx0
–TxRx0
+TxRx1
GPS power out, Alignment tone out, GPS data out
GPS data in
–TxRx1
GPS 0v
GPS Sync in
Page 5-11
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Testing system components
RJ-45 Pinout for Straight-through Ethernet Cable
Table 65 Straight-through Ethernet Cable
Table 66 RJ-45 pinout for straight-through Ethernet cable
Pin
Signal
Pair
Color
TP1+
White/orange stripe
TP1-
Orange solid
TP2+
White/green stripe
TP3-
Blue solid
TP3+
White/blue stripe
TP2-
Green solid
TP4+
White/brown stripe
TP4-
Brown solid
RJ-45 Pinout for Crossover Ethernet Cable
Figure 33 Crossover Ethernet Cable
Page 5-12
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Testing system components
Table 67 RJ-45 pinout for crossover Ethernet cable
Connection 1
Connection 2
Pin
Signal
Pair
Color
Signal
Pair
Color
TP2+
White/green stripe
TP1+
White/orange stripe
TP2-
Green solid
TP1-
Orange solid
TP1+
White/orange stripe
TP2+
White/green stripe
TP3-
Blue solid
TP3-
Blue solid
TP3+
White/blue stripe
TP3+
White/blue stripe
TP1-
Orange solid
TP2-
Green solid
TP4+
White/brown stripe
TP4+
White/brown stripe
TP4-
Brown solid
TP4-
Brown solid
AP/BHM to UGPS cable
The AP/BHM to UGPS cable can be constructed from RJ12 to RJ 45 cable using the ping
configuration described in Table 68.
Table 68 AP/BHM to UGPS cable pinout
Pin
450i AP RJ 45
Connector
Pin
UGPS RJ 12 Connector Connector
NC
8 on RJ 45
NC
NC
NC
5 on RJ 45
4 on RJ 12
4 on RJ 45
3 on RJ 12
NC
NC
7 on RJ 45
6 on RJ 12
1 on RJ 12
Page 5-13
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Testing system components
Note
The AP/BHM will only power up the UGPS if it configured to do so.
Alignment tone cable
The alignment tone cable is constructed using RJ45 plug and Stereo plug. The pin configuration is
shown in Figure 34 Alignment tone cable pin configuration
Figure 34 Alignment tone cable pin configuration
Resistors
#8
#1
Pin 7
Pin 4
Left
220 Ω
Right
220 Ω
Common
Override plug cable
To construct an override plug, perform the following steps:
•
Crip a RJ-11 6 pin connector onto a 6 inch length of CAT 5 cable
•
Pin out all 6 pins
•
Short (solder together) pins 4 and 6 on the other end. Do not connect any other wires to
anything.
Figure 35 RJ-11 pinout for the default plug
Page 5-14
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Configuring Link for Test
Configuring Link for Test
It is important to stage the AP/BHM and SM/BHS units first to verify proper registration before
deploying the modules to the site. To begin configuring the modules for test, see the sections
below:
Configuring the management PC
To configure the local management PC to communicate with the AP, SM, BHM or BHS, proceed as
follows:
Powering the AP/SM/BH for test configuration
Perform the following steps to power on the ODU.
Procedure 1 Powering the ODU
Plug one end of a CAT 5 Ethernet cable into the ODU.
Plug the Ethernet cable connector labeled To Radio into the jack in the pig tail that
hangs from the power supply.
Plug the other connector of the pig tail (this connector labeled To Computer) into the
Ethernet jack of the computing device.
Plug the power supply into an electrical outlet.
W arning
From this point until you remove power from the ODU, stay at least as
far from the AP as the minimum separation distance specified in
Minimum separation distances on page 5-3.
Power up the computing device
Start the browser in the computing device
The AP/BHM interface provides a series of web pages to configure and monitor the unit. Access
web-based interface through a computing device that is either directly connected or connected
through a network to the AP/BHM. If the computing device is not connected to a network when it is
being configured for test environment, and if the computer has used a proxy server address and
port to configure a module, then the operator may need to first disable the proxy setting in the
computer.
Page 5-15
Chapter 5: Preparing for installation
Configuring Link for Test
Perform the following procedure to toggle the computer to not use the proxy setting.
Procedure 2 Bypassing browser proxy settings to access module web pages
Launch Microsoft Internet Explorer
Select Tools, Internet Options, Connections, LAN Settings. Alternate web
browser menu selections may differ.
Uncheck the Use a proxy server box.
In the address bar of your browser, enter the IP address of the AP/BHM. (For example, enter
http://169.254.1.1 to access the AP/BHM through its default IP address). The AP/BHM
responds by opening the General Status tab of its Home page.
Logging into the web interface – AP/SM/BH
Procedure 3 Logging into the web interface
Plug one end of a CAT 5 Ethernet cable into the AP/BHM
Plug the Ethernet cable connector labeled To Radio into the jack in the pig tail that
hangs from the power supply.
Plug the other connector of the pig tail (this connector labeled To Computer) into the
Ethernet jack of the computing device.
Plug the power supply into an electrical outlet.
W arning
From this point until you remove power from the ODU, stay at least as
far from the ODU as the minimum separation distance specified in
Minimum separation distances on page 5-3.
Using the Quick Start Configuration Wizard of the
AP/BHM
See section Error! Reference source not found. on page Error! Bookmark not defined..
Page 5-16
Chapter 6:
Installation
This chapter describes how to install and test the hardware for a PMP/PTP 450(i) link.
Refer to supporting document 450(i) Installation
Page 6-1
Chapter 7:
Configuration
This chapter describes how to use the web interface to configure the PMP/PTP 450(i) link. This
chapter contains the following topics:
Please refer to:
450(i) Configuration, Tools, and Operation
Page 7-2
Chapter 8:
Tools
The AP and SM GUIs provide several tools to analyze the operating environment, system
performance and networking, including:
Please refer to:
450(i) Configuration, Tools, and OperationTools
Page 8-3
Chapter 9:
Reference Information
This chapter contains reference information and regulatory notices that apply to the
PMP/PTP 450(i) Series products.
The following topics are described in this chapter:
•
Equipment specifications on page 9-2 contains specifications of the PMP/PTP 450(i), ODU
specifications including RF bands, channel width and link loss.
•
Data network specifications on page 9-23 shows the PMP/PTP 450(i) Ethernet interface
specifications.
•
Compliance with safety standards on page 4-22 lists the safety specifications against which the
PMP/PTP 450(i) has been tested and certified. It also describes how to keep RF exposure within
safe limits.
•
Country specific radio regulations on page 9-34 describes how the PMP/PTP 450(i) complies
with the radio regulations that are enforced in various countries.
•
Equipment Disposal on page 9-49 describes the Equipment Disposal system for Electronic and
Electric Equipment.
Page 9-1
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Equipment specifications
Equipment specifications
This section contains specifications of the AP, SM, BHM and BHS associated supplies required for
PMP/PTP 450(i) installations.
Specifications for PMP 450i AP
The PMP 450i AP conforms to the specifications listed in Table 69.
Table 69 PMP 450i AP specifications
Category
Specification
Model Number
PMP 450i AP
Spectrum
Channel Spacing
5, 10 and 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments
Frequency Range
900 MHz
18
4900 - 5925 MHz
Channel Width
900 MHz
5, 7, 10 and 20 MHz
4900 – 5925
MHz
5, 10 and 20 MHz
Interface
MAC (Media Access
Control) Layer
Cambium Proprietary
Physical Layer
2x2 MIMO OFDM
Ethernet Interface
10/100/1000BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated
(802.3 compliant)
Protocols Used
IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, FTP
Network Management
HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, SNMP v3
VLAN
802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority,
dynamic port VID
Sensitivity
18
900 MHz support planned for future release.
Page 9-2
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Nominal Receive
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
5 MHz Channel
Equipment specifications
900 MHz
1x = --93 dBm, 2x = -86 dBm, 4x = -83 dBm, 6x = -77
dBm, 8x = -71 dBm
4.9 GHz
1x = --90 dBm, 2x = -85.7 dBm, 4x = -80 dBm, 6x = -72.4
dBm, 8x = -65.7 dBm
5.4 GHz
1x = --91 dBm, 2x = -86.3 dBm, 4x = -79.8 dBm, 6x = 73.5 dBm, 8x = -66 dBm
5.8 GHz
1x = -91 dBm, 2x = -86.3 dBm, 4x = --79.8 dBm, 6x = 73.5 dBm, 8x = -66 dBm
Nominal Receive
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
7 MHz Channel
900 MHz
1x = --91 dBm, 2x = -84 dBm, 4x = -83 dBm, 6x = -77
dBm, 8x = -71 dBm
Nominal Receive
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
10 MHz Channel
900 MHz
1x = --90 dBm, 2x = -83 dBm, 4x = -80 dBm, 6x = -74
dBm, 8x = -68 dBm
4.9 GHz
1x = --87.9 dBm, 2x = -84.1 dBm, 4x = -78 dBm, 6x = 71.5 dBm, 8x = -64.8 dBm
5.4 GHz
1x = --88 dBm, 2x = -84.1 dBm, 4x = -77.1 dBm, 6x = 71.2 dBm, 8x = -64.2 dBm
5.8 GHz
1x = --88 dBm, 2x = -84.1 dBm, 4x = -77.1 dBm, 6x = 71.2 dBm, 8x = -64.2 dBm
900 MHz
1x = --87 dBm, 2x = -80 dBm, 4x = -77 dBm, 6x = -72
dBm, 8x = -65 dBm
4.9 GHz
1x = --85.6 dBm, 2x = -80.4 dBm, 4x = -74.3 dBm, 6x = 68.2 dBm, 8x = -61 dBm
5.4 GHz
1x = --86 dBm, 2x = -82 dBm, 4x = -75 dBm, 6x = -68.9
dBm, 8x = -61 dBm
5.8 GHz
1x = --86 dBm, 2x = -82 dBm, 4x = -75 dBm, 6x = -68.9
dBm, 8x = -61 dBm
Nominal Receive
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
20 MHz Channel
Performance
ARQ
Yes
Cyclic Prefix
1/16
Frame Period
2.5 ms or 5.0 ms
Modulation Levels
Modution Levels
Page 9-3
MCS
SNR (in dB)
Chapter 9: Reference Information
(Adaptive)
Equipment specifications
2x
QPSK
10
4x
16QAM
17
6x
64QAM
24
8x
256QAM
32
Latency
3 - 5 ms
Maximum Deployment
Range
Up to 40 miles (64 km)
GPS Synchronization
Yes, via Autosync (CMM4), via UGPS
Quality of Service
Diffserv QoS
Link Budget
Antenna Beam Width
Antenna Gain (Does
not include cable loss,
~1dB)
90° (3dB rolloff) sector for integrated (Dual polarity,
H+V)
5 GHz
16 dBi integrated 90° sector or external
Transmit Power Range
40 dB dynamic range (to EIRP limit by region) (1 dB
step)
Maximum Transmit
Power
+27 dBm combined output (for 5 GHz)
+25 dBm combined output (for 900MHz)
Physical
Sync/AUX port
RJ45
•
10/100/100BASE-T Ethernet Data (not support in
this release)
•
PoE output (not supported in this release)
•
Sync input or output (Connection and powering of
UGPS Sync input)
Antenna Connection
50 ohm, N-type (Connectorized version only)
Surge Suppression
EN61000-4-5
EN61000-4-5: 1.2us/50us, 500 V voltage waveform
Mean Time Between
Failure
> 40 Years
Environmental
IP66, IP67
Temperature /
-40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F), 0-95% non-
Recommended external surge suppressor: Cambium
Networks Model # C000000L033A
Page 9-4
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Humidity
Weight
Wind Survival
Dimension(HxWxD)
Equipment specifications
condensing
Connectorized
Approx. 2.0 kg (4.5 lbs)
Integrated
Approx. 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs)
Connectorized
322 km/h (200 mi/h)
Integrated
200 km/h (124 mi/h)
Connectorized
26.0 x 13.4 x 6.4 cm (10.3” x 5.3” x 3.3”)
Integrated
37.0 x 37.0 x 6.3 cm (14.5” x 14.5” x 3.2”)
Power Consumption
15 W typical, 25 W max, 55 W max with Aux port PoE
out enabled
Input Voltage
48-59 V DC, 802.3at compliant
Mounting
Wall or Pole mount with Cambium Networks Model #
N000045L002A
Security
Encryption
56-bit DES, FIPS-197 128-bit AES
Page 9-5
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Equipment specifications
Specifications for PMP 450i SM
The PMP 450i SM conforms to the specifications listed in Table 70.
Table 70 PMP 450i SM specifications
Category
Specification
Model Number
PMP 450i SM
Spectrum
Channel Spacing
5, 10 and 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments
Frequency Range
902 – 928 MHz
4900 - 5925 MHz
Channel Width
900 MHz
19
4900 – 5925
MHz
5, 7, 10 and 20 MHz
5, 10 and 20 MHz
Interface
MAC (Media Access
Control) Layer
Cambium Proprietary
Physical Layer
2x2 MIMO OFDM
Ethernet Interface
10/100/1000BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated
(802.3 compliant)
Protocols Used
IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, FTP
Network Management
HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, SNMP v2c and v3
VLAN
802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority,
dynamic port VID
Sensitivity
Nominal Receive
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
5 MHz Channel
19
4.9 GHz
1x = -93 dBm, 2x = -88.5 dBm, 4x = -81.4 dBm, 6x = -75
dBm, 8x = -67.5 dBm
5.4 GHz
1x = -93 dBm, 2x = -88.7 dBm, 4x = -82.4 dBm, 6x = 76.1 dBm, 8x = -68.5 dBm
5.8 GHz
1x = -93 dBm, 2x = -89.6 dBm, 4x = -82.6 dBm, 6x = 76.4 dBm, 8x = -67 dBm
900 MHz support planned for future release.
Page 9-6
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Nominal Receive
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
10 MHz Channel
Nominal Receive
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
20 MHz Channel
Equipment specifications
4.9 GHz
1x = -89.7 dBm, 2x = -84.6 dBm, 4x = -78.6 dBm, 6x = 71.7 dBm, 8x = -65.7 dBm
5.4 GHz
1x = -89.5 dBm, 2x = -86.3 dBm, 4x = -79.3 dBm, 6x = 73.1 dBm, 8x = -65.4 dBm
5.8 GHz
1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -85.2 dBm, 4x = -78.7 dBm, 6x = -73
dBm, 8x = -65.2 dBm
4.9 GHz
1x = -86.8 dBm, 2x = -82 dBm, 4x = -75.7 dBm, 6x = 69.4 dBm, 8x = -62.7 dBm
5.4 GHz
1x = -86.1 dBm, 2x = -82.3 dBm, 4x = -76 dBm, 6x = 69.3 dBm, 8x = -62.3 dBm
5.8 GHz
1x = -87.5 dBm, 2x = -83.1 dBm, 4x = -76.3 dBm, 6x = 69.1 dBm, 8x = -61.3 dBm
Performance
ARQ
Yes
Cyclic Prefix
1/16
Frame Period
2.5 ms or 5.0 ms
Modulation Levels
(Adaptive)
Modulation Levels
MCS
SNR (in dB)
2x
QPSK
10
4x
16QAM
17
6x
64QAM
24
8x
256QAM
32
Latency
3 - 5 ms
Maximum Deployment
Range
Up to 40 miles (64 km)
GPS Synchronization
Yes, via Autosync (CMM4)
Quality of Service
Diffserv QoS
Link Budget
Antenna Beam Width
Antenna Gain (Does
not include cable loss,
10° azimuth for 23 dBi integrated antenna
5 GHz
+23 dBi H+V, integrated or external
Page 9-7
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Equipment specifications
~1dB)
Transmit Power Range
40 dB dynamic range (to EIRP limit by region) (1 dB
step)
Maximum Transmit
Power
+27 dBm combined output (for 5 GHz)
+25 dBm combined output (for 900 MHz)
Physical
Sync/AUX port
RJ45
•
10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data (not support in
this release)
•
PoE output (not support in this release)
•
Sync input or output (Connection and powering of
UGPS Sync input)
Antenna Connection
50 ohm, N-type (Connectorized version only)
Surge Suppression
EN61000-4-5
EN61000-4-5: 1.2us/50us, 500 V voltage waveform
Mean Time Between
Failure
> 40 Years
Environmental
IP66, IP67
Temperature /
Humidity
-40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F), 0-95% noncondensing
Weight
Wind Survival
Dimension(HxWxD)
Recommended external surge suppressor: Cambium
Networks Model # C000000L033A
Connectorized
Approx. 2.0 kg (4.5 lbs)
Integrated
Approx. 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs)
Connectorized
322 km/h (200 mi/h)
Integrated
200 km/h (124 mi/h)
Connectorized
26.0 x 13.4 x 6.4 cm (10.3” x 5.3” x 3.3”)
Integrated
31.0 x 31.0 x 6.4 cm (12” x 12” x 2.5”)
Power Consumption
15 W typical, 25 W max, 55 W max with Aux port PoE
out enabled
Input Voltage
48-59 V DC, 802.3at compliant
Mounting
Wall or Pole mount with Cambium Networks Model #
N000045L002A
Security
Encryption
56-bit DES, FIPS-197 128-bit AES
Page 9-8
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Equipment specifications
Page 9-9
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Equipment specifications
Specifications for PTP 450i BH
The PTP 450i BH conforms to the specifications listed in Table 71.
Table 71 PTP 450i BH specifications
Category
Specification
Model Number
PMP 450i BH
Spectrum
Channel Spacing
5, 10 and 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments
Frequency Range
4900 - 5925 MHz
Channel Width
5, 10 and 20 MHz
Interface
MAC (Media Access
Control) Layer
Cambium Proprietary
Physical Layer
2x2 MIMO OFDM
Ethernet Interface
10/100/1000BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated
(802.3 compliant)
Protocols Used
IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, FTP
Network Management
HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, SNMP v2c and v3
VLAN
802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority,
dynamic port VID
Sensitivity
Nominal Receive
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
5 MHz Channel
Nominal Receive
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
10 MHz Channel
4.9 GHz
1x = -92.7 dBm, 2x = -88.1 dBm, 4x = -81 dBm, 6x = -75
dBm, 8x = -67.8 dBm
5.4 GHz
1x = -92.4 dBm, 2x = -88.4 dBm, 4x = -81.3 dBm, 6x = 75.5 dBm, 8x = -67.8 dBm
5.8 GHz
1x = -92.3 dBm, 2x = -87.5 dBm, 4x = -80.4 dBm, 6x = 74 dBm, 8x = -67.2 dBm
4.9 GHz
1x = -89.2 dBm, 2x = -85.1 dBm, 4x = -77.8 dBm, 6x = 72 dBm, 8x = -64.9 dBm
5.4 GHz
1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -85 dBm, 4x = -78.7 dBm, 6x = -71.6
dBm, 8x = -64.4 dBm
5.8 GHz
1x = -89.9 dBm, 2x = -84.3 dBm, 4x = -78 dBm, 6x = 71.5 dBm, 8x = -64 dBm
Page 9-10
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Nominal Receive
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
20 MHz Channel
Equipment specifications
4.9 GHz
1x = -87.1 dBm, 2x = -82.1 dBm, 4x = -74.7 dBm, 6x = 69.2 dBm, 8x = -61.2 dBm
5.4 GHz
1x = -86 dBm, 2x = -81.6 dBm, 4x = -74.9 dBm, 6x = 68.4 dBm, 8x = -61 dBm
5.8 GHz
1x = -86.6 dBm, 2x = -80.4 dBm, 4x = -74.7 dBm, 6x = 68.5 dBm, 8x = -61 dBm
Performance
ARQ
Yes
Cyclic Prefix
1/16
Frame Period
2.5 ms or 5.0 ms
Modulation Levels
(Adaptive)
Modulation Levels
MCS
SNR (in dB)
2x
QPSK
10
4x
16QAM
17
6x
64QAM
24
8x
256QAM
32
Latency
3 - 5 ms
Maximum Deployment
Range
Up to 40 miles (64 km)
GPS Synchronization
Yes, via Autosync (CMM4)
Quality of Service
Diffserv QoS
Link Budget
Antenna Beam Width
Antenna Gain (Does
not include cable loss,
~1dB)
10° azimuth for 23 dBi integrated antenna
5 GHz
+23 dBi H+V, integrated or external
Transmit Power Range
40 dB dynamic range (to EIRP limit by region) (1 dB
step)
Maximum Transmit
Power
+27 dBm combined output
Physical
Sync/AUX port
RJ45
•
10/100/1000BASE-T Ethernet Data
•
PoE output
•
Sync input or output (Connection and powering of
Page 9-11
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Equipment specifications
UGPS Sync input)
Antenna Connection
50 ohm, N-type (Connectorized version only)
Surge Suppression
EN61000-4-5
EN61000-4-5: 1.2us/50us, 500 V voltage waveform
Mean Time Between
Failure
> 40 Years
Environmental
IP66, IP67
Temperature /
Humidity
-40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F), 0-95% noncondensing
Weight
Wind Survival
Dimension(HxWxD)
Recommended external surge suppressor: Cambium
Networks Model # C000000L033A
Connectorized
Approx. 2.0 kg (4.5 lbs)
Integrated
Approx. 2.5 kg (5.5 lbs)
Connectorized
322 km/h (200 mi/h)
Integrated
200 km/h (124 mi/h)
Connectorized
26.0 x 13.4 x 6.4 cm (10.25” x 5.25” x 3.25”)
Integrated
31.0 x 31.0 x 6.4 cm (12” x 12” x 2.5”)
Power Consumption
15 W typical, 25 W max, 55 W max with Aux port PoE
out enabled
Input Voltage
48-59 V DC, 802.3at compliant
Mounting
Wall or Pole mount with Cambium Networks Model #
N000045L002A
Security
Encryption
56-bit DES, FIPS-197 128-bit AES
Page 9-12
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Equipment specifications
Specifications for PMP 450 AP
The PMP 450 AP conforms to the specifications listed in Table 72.
Table 72 PMP 450 AP specifications
Category
Specification
Model Number
PMP 450 AP
Spectrum
Channel Spacing
5, 10 and 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments
Frequency Range
Channel Width
2.4 GHz
2400 – 2483.5 MHz
3.5 GHz
3300 – 3600 MHz
3.65 GHz
3550 – 3800 MHz
5 GHz
5470 – 5875 MHz
3.5 and 3.65 GHz
5, 7, 10 and 20 MHz
2.4 and 5 GHz
5, 10 and 20 MHz
OFDM Subcarriers
512 FFT
Interface
MAC (Media Access
Control) Layer
Cambium Proprietary
Physical Layer
2x2 MIMO OFDM
Ethernet Interface
10/100 BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated
(802.3 compliant)
Protocols Used
IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, FTP
Network Management
HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, SNMP v3
VLAN
802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p
priority, dynamic port VID
Sensitivity
Nominal Receive
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
5 MHz Channel
2.4 GHz
1x = -91 dBm, 2x = -91 dBm, 4x = -85 dBm, 6x = -78
dBm, 8x = -70 dBm
3.5 GHz
1x = -92 dBm, 2x = -92 dBm, 4x = -86 dBm, 6x = -79
Page 9-13
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Equipment specifications
dBm, 8x = -71 dBm
Nominal Receive
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
7 MHz Channel
Nominal Receive
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
10 MHz Channel
Nominal Receive
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
20 MHz Channel
3.65 GHz
1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -90 dBm, 4x = -83 dBm, 6x = -76
dBm, 8x = -68 dBm
5.4 GHz
1x = -89 dBm, 2x = -89 dBm, 4x = -81 dBm, 6x = -75
dBm, 8x = -66 dBm
5.8 GHz
1x = -88 dBm, 2x = -88 dBm, 4x = -81 dBm, 6x = -75
dBm, 8x = -65 dBm
3.5 GHz
1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -90 dBm, 4x = -83 dBm, 6x = -77
dBm, 8x = -71 dBm
3.65 GHz
1x = -89 dBm, 2x = -89 dBm, 4x = -82 dBm, 6x = -75
dBm, 8x = -67 dBm
2.4 GHz
1x = -88 dBm, 2x = -88 dBm, 4x = -81 dBm, 6x = -75
dBm, 8x = -69 dBm
3.5 GHz
1x = -88 dBm, 2x = -88 dBm, 4x = -81 dBm, 6x = -76
dBm, 8x = -68 dBm
3.65 GHz
1x = -86 dBm, 2x = -86 dBm, 4x = -80 dBm, 6x = -73
dBm, 8x = -66 dBm
5.4 GHz
1x = -84 dBm, 2x = -84 dBm, 4x = -78 dBm, 6x = -72
dBm, 8x = -63 dBm
5.8 GHz
1x = -84 dBm, 2x = -84 dBm, 4x = -77 dBm, 6x = -71
dBm, 8x = -63 dBm
2.4 GHz
1x = -85 dBm, 2x = -85 dBm, 4x = -79 dBm, 6x = -72
dBm, 8x = -66 dBm
3.5 GHz
1x = -85 dBm, 2x = -85 dBm, 4x = -79 dBm, 6x = -72
dBm, 8x = -65 dBm
3.65 GHz
1x = -86 dBm, 2x = -86 dBm, 4x = -78 dBm, 6x = -71
dBm, 8x = -63 dBm
5.4 GHz
1x = -81 dBm, 2x = -81 dBm, 4x = -75 dBm, 6x = -68
dBm, 8x = -59 dBm
5.8 GHz
1x = -82 dBm, 2x = -82 dBm, 4x = -75 dBm, 6x = -69
dBm, 8x = -60 dBm
Performance
Subscribers Per Sector
Up to 238
ARQ
Yes
Page 9-14
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Equipment specifications
Cyclic Prefix
1/16
Frame Period
2.5 ms or 5.0 ms
Modulation Levels
(Adaptive)
Modulation
Levels
MCS
SNR (in dB)
2x
QPSK
10
4x
16QAM
17
6x
64QAM
24
8x
256QAM
32
Latency
3 - 5 ms for 2.5 ms Frame Period
6-10 ms for 5.0 ms Frame Period
Maximum Deployment Range
Up to 40 miles (64 km)
Packets Per Second
12,500
GPS Synchronization
Yes, via CMM3, CMM4 or UGPS
Quality of Service
Diffserv QoS
Link Budget
Antenna Gain (Does
not include cable loss,
~1dB)
2.4 GHz
18 dBi Dual Slant
3.5 GHz
16 dBi Dual Slant
3.65 GHz
16 dBi Dual Slant
5 GHz
17 dBi Horizontal and Vertical
Combined Transmit
Power
-30 to +22 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) in 1 dBconfigurable intervals (2.4 GHz, 5 GHz)
-30 to +25 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) in 1 dBconfigurable intervals (3.5 GHz)
-30 to +25 dBm (to EIRP limit by region and channel
bandwidth) in 1 dB-configurable intervals (3.6 GHz)
Maximum Transmit
Power
22 dBm combined OFDM (2.4GHz, 5 GHz)
(dependent upon Region Code setting)
25 dBm combined OFDM (3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz),
(dependent upon Region Code setting)
Physical
Wind Survival
2.4 GHz
216 km/hour (135 mi/hour)
Page 9-15
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Equipment specifications
3.5 GHz
216 km/hour (135 mi/hour)
3.65 GHz
216 km/hour (135 mi/hour)
5 GHz
190 km/hour (118 mi/hour)
Antenna Connection
50 ohm, N-type (Connectorized version only)
Environmental
IP66, IP67
Temperature /
Humidity
-40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F) /
Weight
0-95% non-condensing
2.4 GHz
15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna
2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna
3.5 GHz
15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna
2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna
3.6 GHz
15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna
2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna
5 GHz
5.9 kg (13 lbs) with antenna
2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna
Dimension(HxWxD)
2.4 GHz
Radio: 27 x 21 x 7 cm (10.6” x 8.3” x 2.8”)
Antenna: 112.2 x 24.5 x 11.7 cm (44.2” x 9.6” x 4.6”)
3.5 GHz
3.6 GHz
5 GHz
Radio: 27 x 21 x 7 cm (10.6” x 8.3” x 2.8”)
Antenna: 51 x 13 x 7.3 cm (20.2” x 5.1” x 2.9”)
Power Consumption
14 W
Input Voltage
22 to 32 VDC
Security
Encryption
56-bit DES, AES
Page 9-16
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Equipment specifications
Specifications for PMP 450 SM
The PMP 450 SM conforms to the specifications listed in Table 73.
Table 73 PMP 450 SM specifications
Category
Specification
Model Number
PMP 450 SM
Spectrum
Channel Spacing
5, 10 and 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments
Frequency Range
Channel Width
900 MHz
20
902 – 928 MHz
2.4 GHz
2400 – 2483.5 MHz
3.5 GHz
3300 – 3600 MHz
3.65 GHz
3550 – 3800 MHz
5 GHz
5470 – 5875 MHz
900 MHz, 3.5 GHz
and 3.65 GHz
5, 7, 10 and 20 MHz
2.4 and 5 GHz
5, 10 and 20 MHz
OFDM Subcarriers
512 FFT
Interface
MAC (Media Access
Control) Layer
Cambium Proprietary
Physical Layer
2x2 MIMO OFDM
Ethernet Interface
10/100 BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated
(802.3 compliant)
Protocols Used
IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, FTP
Network Management
HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, FTP, SNMP v3
VLAN
802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p
priority, dynamic port VID
Sensitivity
Nominal Receive
20
900 MHz
1x = -91 dBm, 2x = -91 dBm, 4x = -85 dBm, 6x = -78
900 MHz support planned for future release.
Page 9-17
Chapter 9: Reference Information
dBm, 8x = -70 dBm
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
5 MHz Channel
Nominal Receive
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
7 MHz Channel
Nominal Receive
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
10 MHz Channel
Nominal Receive
Sensitivity (w/ FEC) @
20 MHz Channel
Equipment specifications
2.4 GHz
1x = -91 dBm, 2x = -91 dBm, 4x = -85 dBm, 6x = -78
dBm, 8x = -70 dBm
3.5 GHz
1x = -92 dBm, 2x = -92 dBm, 4x = -86 dBm, 6x = -79
dBm, 8x = -71 dBm
3.65 GHz
1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -90 dBm, 4x = -83 dBm, 6x = -76
dBm, 8x = -68 dBm
5.4 GHz
1x = -89 dBm, 2x = -89 dBm, 4x = -81 dBm, 6x = -75
dBm, 8x = -66 dBm
5.8 GHz
1x = -88 dBm, 2x = -88 dBm, 4x = -81 dBm, 6x = -75
dBm, 8x = -65 dBm
900 MHz
1x = --91 dBm, 2x = -84 dBm, 4x = -83 dBm, 6x = -77
dBm, 8x = -71 dBm
3.5 GHz
1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -90 dBm, 4x = -83 dBm, 6x = -77
dBm, 8x = -71 dBm
3.65 GHz
1x = -89 dBm, 2x = -89 dBm, 4x = -82 dBm, 6x = -75
dBm, 8x = -67 dBm
900 MHz
1x = --90 dBm, 2x = -83 dBm, 4x = -80 dBm, 6x = -74
dBm, 8x = -68 dBm
2.4 GHz
1x = -88 dBm, 2x = -88 dBm, 4x = -81 dBm, 6x = -75
dBm, 8x = -69 dBm
3.5 GHz
1x = -88 dBm, 2x = -88 dBm, 4x = -81 dBm, 6x = -76
dBm, 8x = -68 dBm
3.65 GHz
1x = -86 dBm, 2x = -86 dBm, 4x = -80 dBm, 6x = -73
dBm, 8x = -66 dBm
5.4 GHz
1x = -84 dBm, 2x = -84 dBm, 4x = -78 dBm, 6x = -72
dBm, 8x = -63 dBm
5.8 GHz
1x = -84 dBm, 2x = -84 dBm, 4x = -77 dBm, 6x = -71
dBm, 8x = -63 dBm
900 MHz
1x = --87 dBm, 2x = -80 dBm, 4x = -77 dBm, 6x = -72
dBm, 8x = -65 dBm
2.4 GHz
1x = -85 dBm, 2x = -85 dBm, 4x = -79 dBm, 6x = -72
dBm, 8x = -66 dBm
3.5 GHz
1x = -85 dBm, 2x = -85 dBm, 4x = -79 dBm, 6x = -72
dBm, 8x = -65 dBm
3.65 GHz
1x = -86 dBm, 2x = -86 dBm, 4x = -78 dBm, 6x = -71
dBm, 8x = -63 dBm
Page 9-18
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Equipment specifications
5.4 GHz
1x = -81 dBm, 2x = -81 dBm, 4x = -75 dBm, 6x = -68
dBm, 8x = -59 dBm
5.8 GHz
1x = -82 dBm, 2x = -82 dBm, 4x = -75 dBm, 6x = -69
dBm, 8x = -60 dBm
Performance
Subscribers Per Sector
Up to 238
ARQ
Yes
Cyclic Prefix
1/16
Frame Period
2.5 ms or 5.0 ms
Modulation Levels
(Adaptive)
Modulation Levels
MCS
SNR (in dB)
2x
QPSK
10
4x
16QAM
17
6x
64QAM
24
8x
256QAM
32
Latency
3 - 5 ms for 2.5 ms Frame Period
6-10 ms for 5.0 ms Frame Period
Maximum Deployment Range
Up to 40 miles (64 km)
GPS Synchronization
Yes
Quality of Service
Diffserv QoS
Link Budget
Antenna Gain (Does
not include cable loss,
~1dB)
Combined Transmit
Power
900 MHz
12 dBi Yagi antenna
2.4 GHz
7 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch
3.5 GHz
8 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch
3.65 GHz
8 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch
5 GHz
9 dBi H+V, integrated patch
-30 to +22 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) – 2.4 GHz, 5
GHz
-30 to +25 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) – 3.5 GHz,
3.6 GHz
Maximum Transmit
22 dBm combined OFDM (2.4GHz, 5 GHz)
Page 9-19
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Power
Equipment specifications
(dependent upon Region Code setting)
25 dBm combined OFDM (3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz),
(dependent upon Region Code setting)
Reflector antenna gain
Other antenna (5 GHz
only)
900 MHz
TBC
2.4 GHz
+12 dBi
3.5 GHz
+11 dBi
3.65 GHz
+11 dBi
5 GHz
+15 dBi
CLIP Gain
+8 dBi
LENS Gain
+5.5 dBi
Dish
+17 dBi
Physical
Wind Survival
190 km/hour (118 mi/hour)
Antenna Connection
50 ohm, N-type (Connectorized version only)
Environmental
IP55
Temperature /
Humidity
-40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F) /
Weight
0-95% non-condensing
2.4 GHz
15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna
2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna
3.5 GHz
15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna
2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna
3.6 GHz
15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna
2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna
5 GHz
5.9 kg (13 lbs) with antenna
2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna
Dimensions (H x W x D)
30 x 9 x 9 cm (11.75” x 3.4” x 3.4”)
Power Consumption
12 W
Input Voltage
20 to 32 VDC
Security
Encryption
56-bit DES, AES
Page 9-20
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Equipment specifications
PSU specifications
The PMP/PTP 450i AC+DC Enhanced Power Injector conforms to the specifications listed in Table
74.
Table 74 PMP/PTP 450i AC power Injector specifications
Category
Specification
Dimensions
137 mm (5.4 in) x 56 mm (2.2 in) x 38 mm (1.5 in)
Weight
0.240 Kg (0.5 lbs)
Temperature
0°C to +40°C
Humidity
90% non-condensing
Waterproofing
Not waterproof
Altitude
Sea level to 5000 meters (16000 ft)
AC Input
Min 90 V AC, 57 – 63 Hz, max 264 V AC, 47 – 53 Hz.
DC output voltage to the ODU
55V +/- 5%
AC connector
IEC-320-C8
Efficiency
Better than 85%, efficiency level ‘V’
Over Current Protection
Hiccup current limiting, trip point set between 120% to
150% of full load current
Hold up time
At least 10 milliseconds
The PMP/PTP 450 power supply conforms to the specifications listed in Table 75.
Table 75 PMP/PTP 450 power supply specifications (part number: N000900L001A)
Category
Specification
Dimensions
118 mm (4.66 in) x 45 mm (1.75 in) x 32 mm (1.25 in)
Weight
0.240 Kg (0.5 lbs)
Temperature
0°C to +40°C
Humidity
20 to 90%
AC Input
90-264 VAC, 47 – 63 Hz, 0.5 A rms at 120 VAC, 0.25 A rms
at 240 VAC.
DC output voltage to the ODU
30 V +/- 5%
AC connector
IEC-320-C8
Efficiency
Better than 85%, efficiency level ‘V’
Page 9-21
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Equipment specifications
Over Current Protection
Short circuit, with auto recovery; Should restart between
every 0.5 to 2 sec.
Hold up time
10mS min at max load, 120VAC
Page 9-22
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Data network specifications
Data network specifications
This section contains specifications of the PMP/PTP 450(i) Ethernet interface.
Ethernet interface
PMP/PTP 450i
The PMP/PTP 450i Ethernet port conforms to the specifications listed in Table 76.
Table 76 PMP/PTP 450i Main and Aux Ethernet bridging specifications
Ethernet Bridging
Specification
Protocol
IEEE 802.3 compatible
QoS
IEEE 802.1p, IEEE 802.1Q, IEEE 802.1ad, DSCP IPv4
Main Ethernet port
10/100/1000 BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated
Aux Ethernet port
10/100 BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated
Maximum Ethernet Frame
Size
1700 Bytes
PMP/PTP 450
Table 77 PMP/PTP 450 Ethernet bridging specifications
Ethernet Bridging
Specification
Protocol
IEEE 802.3 compatible
QoS
IEEE 802.1p, IEEE 802.1Q, IEEE 802.1ad, DSCP IPv4
Interface
10/100/1000 BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated
Maximum Ethernet Frame
Size
1700 Bytes
Note
Practical Ethernet rates depend on network configuration, higher layer protocols and
platforms used.
Over the air throughput is restricted to the rate of the Ethernet interface at the
receiving end of the link.
Page 9-23
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Wireless specifications
Wireless specifications
This section contains specifications of the PMP/PTP 450(i) wireless interface. These specifications
include RF bands, channel bandwidth, spectrum settings, maximum power and link loss.
General wireless specifications
The wireless specifications that apply to all PMP/PTP 450(i) variants are listed under Table 78.
Table 78 PMP/PTP 450(i) wireless specifications
Item
Specification
Channel selection
Manual selection (fixed frequency).
Manual power control
To avoid interference to other users of the band, maximum power
can be set lower than the default power limit.
Duplex scheme
Adaptive TDD
Range
Band
Platform
Range
5 GHz
PMP/PTP 450(i)
40 mi / 64 km
3.65 GHz
PMP/PTP 450
40 mi / 64 km
3.5 GHz
PMP/PTP 450
40 mi / 64 km
2.4 GHz
PMP 450
40 mi / 64 km
900 MHz
PMP 450i AP
40 mi / 64 km
PMP 450 SM
Over-the-air encryption
DES, AES
Error Correction
Rate 3/4 RS coder
Page 9-24
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Wireless specifications
Link Range
Example of the link ranges for PMP and PTP modes are provided in below tables. These assumes
the transmit power is not limited by the country of operation for the selected band.
PMP 450i
Table 79 Link range – PMP 5.8 GHz link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth, 2.5 ms frame duration,
antenna gain of 17 dBi at AP and 23 dBi at the SM
Parameter
Modulation
Max. LOS
(no fade margin)
Max. nLOS
(additional 5 dB link loss)
Max. NLOS1
(additional 15 dB link loss)
Max. NLOS2
(additional 25 dB link loss)
Range Details (km )
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSKMIMO-A
QPSKMIMO-B
16QAMMIMO-B
64QAMMIMO-B
256QAMMIMO-B
239.6
68.3
35.4
16.8
6.7
134.8
38.4
19.9
9.4
3.8
42.6
12.1
6.3
3.0
1.2
13.5
3.8
2.0
0.9
0.4
PTP 450i
Table 80 Link range – PTP 5.8 GHz link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth, 2.5 ms frame duration,
antenna gain of 23 dBi at each end
Parameter
Modulation
Max. LOS
(no fade margin)
Max. nLOS
(additional 5 dB link loss)
Max. NLOS1
(additional 15 dB link loss)
Max. NLOS2
(additional 25 dB link loss)
Range Details (km )
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSKMIMO-A
QPSKMIMO-B
16QAMMIMO-B
64QAMMIMO-B
256QAMMIMO-B
239.6
136.3
70.7
33.5
13.3
134.8
76.7
39.8
18.8
7.5
42.6
24.2
12.6
6.0
2.4
13.5
7.7
4.0
1.9
0.7
Page 9-25
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Wireless specifications
PMP 450
Table 81 Link range – PMP 5.8 GHz link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth, 2.5 ms frame duration,
antenna gain of 17 dBi at AP
Parameter
SM type
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSKMIMO-A
QPSKMIMO-B
16QAMMIMO-B
64QAMMIMO-B
256QAMMIMO-B
Integrated
7.0 mi /
11.3 km
5.0 mi /
8.0 km
2.3 mi /
3.6 km
1.1 mi /
1.8 km
0.4 mi /
0.6 km
Integrated Dish
(17 dB) SM 450d
40.0 mi /
64.0 km
31.5 mi /
50.4 km
14.2 mi /
22.8 km
7.1 mi /
11.4 km
2.5 mi /
4.0 km
CLIP
(8 dB)
19.9 mi /
31.8 km
14.1 mi /
22.5 km
6.4 mi /
10.2 km
3.2 mi /
5.1 km
1.1 mi /
1.8 km
Reflector Dish
(16 dB)
40.0 mi /
64.0 km
31.5 mi /
50.4 km
14.2 mi /
22.8 km
7.1 mi /
11.4 km
2.5 mi /
4.0 km
Integrated
4.0 mi /
6.3 km
2.8 mi /
4.5 km
1.3 mi /
2.0 km
0.6 mi /
1.0 km
0.2 mi /
0.4 km
Integrated Dish
(17 dB) SM 450d
25.0 mi /
40.0 km
17.7 mi /
28.3 km
8.0 mi /
12.8 km
4.0 mi /
6.4 km
1.4 mi /
2.2 km
CLIP
11.2 mi /
17.9 km
7.9 mi /
12.7 km
3.6 mi /
5.7 km
1.8 mi /
2.9 km
0.6 mi /
1.0 km
25.0 mi /
40.0 km
17.7 mi /
28.3 km
8.0 mi /
12.8 km
4.0 mi /
6.4 km
1.4 mi /
2.2 km
Integrated
1.3 mi /
2.0 km
0.9 mi /
1.4 km
0.4 mi /
0.6 km
0.2 mi /
0.3 km
0.1 mi /
0.1 km
Integrated Dish
(17 dB) SM 450d
7.9 mi /
12.7 km
5.6 mi /
9.0 km
2.5 mi /
4.0 km
1.3 mi /
2.0 km
0.4 mi /
0.7 km
CLIP
3.5 mi /
5.7 km
2.5 mi /
4.0 km
1.1 mi /
1.8 km
0.6 mi /
0.9 km
0.2 mi /
0.3 km
7.9 mi /
12.7 km
5.6 mi /
9.0 km
2.5 mi /
4.0 km
1.3 mi /
2.0 km
0.4 mi /
0.7 km
Integrated
0.4 mi /
0.6 km
0.3 mi /
0.4 km
0.1 mi /
0.2 km
0.1 mi /
0.1 km
0.0 mi /
0.0 km
Integrated Dish
(17 dB) SM 450d
2.5 mi /
4.0 km
1.8 mi /
2.8 km
0.8 mi /
1.3 km
0.4 mi /
0.6 km
0.1 mi /
0.2 km
CLIP
1.1 mi /
0.8 mi /
0.4 mi /
0.2 mi /
0.1 mi /
Modulationà
Max. LOS
(no fade margin)
Max. nLOS
(additional 5 dB
link loss)
(8 dB)
Reflector Dish
(16 dB)
Max. NLOS1
(additional 15 dB
link loss)
(8 dB)
Reflector Dish
(16 dB)
Max. NLOS2
(additional 25 dB
link loss)
Range Details (m i / km)
Page 9-26
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Wireless specifications
(8 dB)
1.8 km
1.3 km
0.6 km
0.3 km
0.1 km
Reflector Dish
2.5 mi /
4.0 km
1.8 mi /
2.8 km
0.8 mi /
1.3 km
0.4 mi /
0.6 km
0.1 mi /
0.2 km
(16 dB)
Table 82 Link range – PMP 5.4 GHz link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth, 2.5 ms frame duration,
antenna gain of 17 dBi at AP
Parameter
SM type
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSKMIMO-A
QPSKMIMO-B
16QAMMIMO-B
64QAMMIMO-B
256QAMMIMO-B
Integrated
6.6 mi /
10.6 km
4.7 mi /
7.5 km
2.4 mi /
3.9 km
1.0 mi /
1.6 km
0.4 mi /
0.6 km
Integrated Dish
(17 dB) SM 450d
40.0 mi /
64.0 km
29.5 mi /
47.2 km
15.2 mi /
24.3 km
6.5 mi /
10.4 km
2.3 mi /
3.7 km
CLIP
(8 dB)
16.6 mi /
26.5 km
11.7 mi /
18.8 km
6.1 mi /
9.7 km
2.6 mi /
4.1 km
0.9 mi /
1.5 km
Reflector Dish
(16 dB)
40.0 mi /
64.0 km
29.5 mi /
47.2 km
15.2 mi /
24.3 km
6.5 mi /
10.4 km
2.3 mi /
3.7 km
Integrated
3.7 mi /
5.9 km
2.6 mi /
4.2 km
1.4 mi /
2.2 km
0.6 mi /
0.9 km
0.2 mi /
0.3 km
Integrated Dish
(17 dB) SM 450d
23.4 mi /
37.5 km
16.6 mi /
26.5 km
8.6 mi /
13.7 km
3.7 mi /
5.9 km
1.3 mi /
2.1 km
CLIP
9.3 mi /
14.9 km
6.6 mi /
10.6 km
3.4 mi /
5.4 km
1.5 mi /
2.3 km
0.5 mi /
0.8 km
23.4 mi /
37.5 km
16.6 mi /
26.5 km
8.6 mi /
13.7 km
3.7 mi /
5.9 km
1.3 mi /
2.1 km
Integrated
1.2 mi /
1.9 km
0.8 mi /
1.3 km
0.4 mi /
0.7 km
0.2 mi /
0.3 km
0.1 mi /
0.1 km
Integrated Dish
(17 dB) SM 450d
7.4 mi /
11.9 km
5.2 mi /
8.4 km
2.7 mi /
4.3 km
1.2 mi /
1.9 km
0.4 mi /
0.7 km
CLIP
2.9 mi /
4.7 km
2.1 mi /
3.3 km
1.1 mi /
1.7 km
0.5 mi /
0.7 km
0.2 mi /
0.3 km
7.4 mi /
11.9 km
5.2 mi /
8.4 km
2.7 mi /
4.3 km
1.2 mi /
1.9 km
0.4 mi /
0.7 km
0.4 mi /
0.6 km
0.3 mi /
0.4 km
0.1 mi /
0.2 km
0.1 mi /
0.1 km
0.0 mi /
0.0 km
Modulationà
Max. LOS
(no fade margin)
Max. nLOS
(additional 5 dB
link loss)
(8 dB)
Reflector Dish
(16 dB)
Max. NLOS1
(additional 15 dB
link loss)
(8 dB)
Reflector Dish
(16 dB)
Max. NLOS2
(additional 25 dB
Range Details (m i / km)
Integrated
Page 9-27
Chapter 9: Reference Information
link loss)
Wireless specifications
Integrated Dish
(17 dB) SM 450d
2.3 mi /
3.7 km
1.7 mi /
2.7 km
0.9 mi /
1.4 km
0.4 mi /
0.6 km
0.1 mi /
0.2 km
CLIP
0.9 mi /
1.5 km
0.7 mi /
1.1 km
0.3 mi /
0.5 km
0.1 mi /
0.2 km
0.1 mi /
0.1 km
2.3 mi /
3.7 km
1.7 mi /
2.7 km
0.9 mi /
1.4 km
0.4 mi /
0.6 km
0.1 mi /
0.2 km
(8 dB)
Reflector Dish
(16 dB)
Table 83 Link range – PMP 2.4 GHz link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth, 2.5 ms frame duration,
antenna gain of 18 dBi at AP
Parameter
SM type
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSKMIMO-A
QPSKMIMO-B
16QAMMIMO-B
64QAMMIMO-B
256QAMMIMO-B
Integrated
22.1 mi /
35.4 km
15.7 mi /
25.1 km
7.6 mi /
12.1 km
3.6 mi /
5.7 km
1.7 mi /
2.8 km
Reflector Dish
(12 dB)
40.0 mi /
64.0 km
40.0 mi /
64.0 km
30.2 mi /
48.4 km
14.3 mi /
22.9 km
6.8 mi /
11.0 km
Integrated
12.5 mi /
19.9 km
8.8 mi /
14.1 km
4.3 mi /
6.8 km
2.0 mi /
3.2 km
1.0 mi /
1.5 km
Reflector Dish
(12 dB)
40.0 mi /
64.0 km
35.1 mi /
56.2 km
17.0 mi /
27.2 km
8.0 mi /
12.9 km
3.8 mi /
6.2 km
Integrated
3.9 mi /
6.3 km
2.8 mi /
4.5 km
1.3 mi /
2.2 km
0.6 mi /
1.0 km
0.3 mi /
0.5 km
Reflector Dish
(12 dB)
15.7 mi /
25.1 km
11.1 mi /
17.8 km
5.4 mi /
8.6 km
2.5 mi /
4.1 km
1.2 mi /
1.9 km
Integrated
1.2 mi /
2.0 km
0.9 mi /
1.4 km
0.4 mi /
0.7 km
0.2 mi /
0.3 km
0.1 mi /
0.2 km
Reflector Dish
(12 dB)
5.0 mi /
7.9 km
3.5 mi /
5.6 km
1.7 mi /
2.7 km
0.8 mi /
1.3 km
0.4 mi /
0.6 km
Modulationà
Max. LOS
(no fade margin)
Max. nLOS
(additional 5 dB
link loss)
Max. NLOS1
(additional 15 dB
link loss)
Max. NLOS2
(additional 25 dB
link loss)
Range Details (m i / km)
Page 9-28
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Wireless specifications
Table 84 Link range – PMP 3.5 GHz link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth, 2.5 ms frame duration,
antenna gain of 16 dBi at AP
Parameter
SM type
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSKMIMO-A
QPSKMIMO-B
16QAMMIMO-B
64QAMMIMO-B
256QAMMIMO-B
Integrated
18.7 mi /
29.9 km
13.2 mi /
21.1 km
6.5 mi /
10.5 km
2.9 mi /
4.7 km
1.0 mi /
1.6 km
Reflector Dish
(11 dB)
40.0 mi /
64.0 km
40.0 mi /
64.0 km
23.2 mi /
37.2 km
10.4 mi /
16.6 km
3.6 mi /
5.8 km
Integrated
10.5 mi /
16.8 km
7.4 mi /
11.9 km
3.7 mi /
5.9 km
1.6 mi /
2.6 km
0.6 mi /
0.9 km
Reflector Dish
(11 dB)
37.3 mi /
59.6 km
26.4 mi /
42.2 km
13.1 mi /
20.9 km
5.8 mi /
9.3 km
2.0 mi /
3.3 km
Integrated
3.3 mi /
5.3 km
2.4 mi /
3.8 km
1.2 mi /
1.9 km
0.5 mi /
0.8 km
0.2 mi /
0.3 km
Reflector Dish
(11 dB)
11.8 mi /
18.8 km
8.3 mi /
13.3 km
4.1 mi /
6.6 km
1.8 mi /
3.0 km
0.6 mi /
1.0 km
Integrated
1.0 mi /
1.7 km
0.7 mi /
1.2 km
0.4 mi /
0.6 km
0.2 mi /
0.3 km
0.1 mi /
0.1 km
Reflector Dish
(11 dB)
3.7 mi /
6.0 km
2.6 mi /
4.2 km
1.3 mi /
2.1 km
0.6 mi /
0.9 km
0.2 mi /
0.3 km
Modulationà
Max. LOS
(no fade margin)
Max. nLOS
(additional 5 dB
link loss)
Max. NLOS1
(additional 15 dB
link loss)
Max. NLOS2
(additional 25 dB
link loss)
Range Details (m i / km)
Table 85 Link range – PMP 3.5 GHz link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth, 2.5 ms frame duration,
antenna gain of 16 dBi at AP
Parameter
SM type
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSKMIMO-A
QPSKMIMO-B
16QAMMIMO-B
64QAMMIMO-B
256QAMMIMO-B
Integrated
20.3 mi /
32.5 km
14.4 mi /
23.0 km
5.7 mi /
9.2 km
2.6 mi /
4.1 km
0.8 mi /
1.3 km
Reflector Dish
(11 dB)
40.0 mi /
64.0 km
40.0 mi /
64.0 km
20.3 mi /
32.5 km
9.1 mi /
14.5 km
2.9 mi /
4.6 km
Integrated
11.4 mi /
18.3 km
8.1 mi /
12.9 km
3.2 mi /
5.1 km
1.4 mi /
2.3 km
0.5 mi /
0.7 km
Reflector Dish
(11 dB)
40.0 mi /
64.0 km
28.7 mi /
45.9 km
11.4 mi /
18.3 km
5.1 mi /
8.2 km
1.6 mi /
2.6 km
Modulationà
Max. LOS
(no fade margin)
Max. nLOS
(additional 5 dB
link loss)
Range Details (m i / km)
Page 9-29
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Max. NLOS1
(additional 15 dB
link loss)
Max. NLOS2
(additional 25 dB
link loss)
Wireless specifications
Integrated
3.6 mi /
5.8 km
2.6 mi /
4.1 km
1.0 mi /
1.6 km
0.5 mi /
0.7 km
0.1 mi /
0.2 km
Reflector Dish
(11 dB)
12.8 mi /
20.5 km
9.1 mi /
14.5 km
3.6 mi /
5.8 km
1.6 mi /
2.6 km
0.5 mi /
0.8 km
Integrated
1.1 mi /
1.8 km
0.8 mi /
1.3 km
0.3 mi /
0.5 km
0.1 mi /
0.2 km
0.0 mi /
0.1 km
Reflector Dish
(11 dB)
4.1 mi /
6.5 km
2.9 mi /
4.6 km
1.1 mi /
1.8 km
0.5 mi /
0.8 km
0.2 mi /
0.3 km
PTP 450
Table 86 Link range –20 MHz Channel Bandwidth, 2.5 ms frame duration
Parameter
BHS
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSKMIMO-A
QPSKMIMO-B
16QAMMIMO-B
64QAMMIMO-B
256QAMMIMO-B
Integrated
3.6 mi /
5.7 km
2.5 mi /
4.0 km
1.3 mi /
2.0 km
0.6 mi /
0.9 km
0.2 mi /
0.3 km
Reflector Dish
(16 dB)
22.5 mi /
36.1 km
16.0 mi /
25.5 km
8.0 mi /
12.8 km
3.6 mi /
5.7 km
1.1 mi /
1.8 km
Integrated
3.7 mi /
5.9 km
2.6 mi /
4.2 km
1.3 mi /
2.1 km
0.6 mi /
0.9 km
0.2 mi /
0.3 km
Reflector Dish
(16 dB)
23.2 mi /
37.0 km
16.4 mi /
26.2 km
8.2 mi /
13.1 km
3.7 mi /
5.9 km
1.1 mi /
1.8 km
Integrated
7.6 mi /
12.2 km
5.4 mi /
8.6 km
2.7 mi /
4.3 km
1.2 mi /
1.9 km
0.4 mi /
0.6 km
Reflector Dish
(11 dB)
27.1 mi /
43.3 km
19.2 mi /
30.7 km
9.6 mi /
15.4 km
4.3 mi /
6.9 km
1.4 mi /
2.2 km
Integrated
8.8 mi /
14.1 km
6.3 mi /
10.0 km
2.9 mi /
4.6 km
1.4 mi /
2.2 km
0.5 mi /
0.7 km
Reflector Dish
(11 dB)
31.3 mi /
50.2 km
22.2 mi /
35.5 km
10.1 mi /
16.2 km
4.9 mi /
7.9 km
1.6 mi /
2.6 km
Modulationà
5.8 GHz
Max. LOS
(no fade margin)
5.4 GHz
Max. LOS
(no fade margin)
3.65 GHz
Max. LOS
(no fade margin)
3.5 GHz
Max. LOS
(no fade margin)
Range Details (m i / km)
Page 9-30
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Wireless specifications
Link Budget
Example of the link budget for PMP and PTP modes are provided in below listed tables. These
assumes the transmit power is not limited by the country of operation for the selected band.
PMP 450
Table 87 Link Budget – PMP 450, 1/16 Cyclic Prefix, 2.5 ms Frame Duration, 75/25 % DL/UL Ratio,
AP connected to one SM
Parameter
Channel BW
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSKMIMO-A
QPSKMIMO-B
16QAMMIMO-B
64QAMMIMO-B
256QAMMIMO-B
20 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
16.2
32.4
64.7
97.1
129.5
10 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
6.9
13.9
27.9
41.8
55.7
5 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
2.2
4.5
13.5
18.1
20 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
16.2
32.4
64.7
97.1
129.5
10 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
6.9
13.9
27.9
41.8
55.7
5 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
2.2
4.5
13.5
18.1
20 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
16.6
33.2
66.4
99.5
132.7
10 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
7.1
14.3
28.7
43
57.3
7 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
4.5
9.1
18
27.1
36
5 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
2.4
4.9
9.9
14.7
19.7
20 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
16.6
33.2
66.4
99.5
132.7
10 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
7.1
14.3
28.7
43
57.3
7 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
4.5
9.1
18
27.1
36
Modulationà
5.8 GHz Max.
Aggregate
Throughput
5.4 GHz Max.
Aggregate
Throughput
3.65 GHz Max.
Aggregate
Throughput
3.5 GHz Max.
Aggregate
Throughput
Link Budget (M bps)
Page 9-31
Chapter 9: Reference Information
2.4 GHz Max.
Aggregate
Throughput
Wireless specifications
5 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
2.4
4.9
9.9
14.7
19.7
20 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
16.2
32.4
64.7
97.1
129.5
10 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
6.9
13.9
27.9
41.8
55.7
5 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
2.2
4.5
13.5
18.1
Page 9-32
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Wireless specifications
PTP 450
Table 88 Link Budget – PTP 450, 1/16 Cyclic Prefix, 2.5 ms Frame Duration, 75/25 % DL/UL Ratio
Parameter
Channel BW
1x
2x
4x
6x
8x
QPSKMIMO-A
QPSKMIMO-B
16QAMMIMO-B
64QAMMIMO-B
256QAMMIMO-B
20 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
17
34
68
102
136
10 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
7.5
15.2
30.3
45.5
60.6
5 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
2.8
5.7
11.5
17.2
23
20 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
17
34
68
102
136
10 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
7.5
15.2
30.3
45.5
60.6
5 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
2.8
5.7
11.5
17.2
23
20 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
17
34
68
102
136
10 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
7.5
15.2
30.3
45.5
60.6
7 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
4.9
9.9
19.6
29.5
39.3
5 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
2.8
5.7
11.5
17.2
23
20 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
17
34
68
102
136
10 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
7.5
15.2
30.3
45.5
60.6
7 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
4.9
9.9
19.6
29.5
39.3
5 MHz Channel:
(up+down)
2.8
5.7
11.5
17.2
23
Modulationà
5.8 GHz Max.
Aggregate
Throughput
5.4 GHz Max.
Aggregate
Throughput
3.65 GHz Max.
Aggregate
Throughput
3.5 GHz Max.
Aggregate
Throughput
Link Budget (M bps)
Page 9-33
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Country specific radio regulations
Country specific radio regulations
This section describes how the PMP/PTP 450(i) complies with the radio regulations that are
enforced in various countries.
Caution
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Cambium could void the user’s
authority to operate the system.
Type approvals
This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world. This means that
the system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply. The
frequency bands in which the system operates may be ‘unlicensed’ and, in these bands, the
system can be used provided it does not cause interference. The system is not guaranteed
protection against interference from other products and installations.
The radio specification type approvals that have been granted for PMP 450 frequency variants are
listed in Table 89.
Table 89 Radio certifications
Variant
Region
Specification (Type Approvals)
2.4-GHz PMP 450
Canada
RSS Gen and RSS-247 ISS1
USA
FCC Part 15 Class B
Canada
RSS Gen and RSS 192
Europe
ETSI EN 302 326-2 V1.2.2
Canada
RSS Gen and RSS 192
USA
FCC Part 15 Class B
5.4-GHz PMP/PTP 450
and 450i
Europe
ETSI EN 301 893 v1.6.1
USA
FCC Part 15 Class B
5.8-GHz PMP/PTP 450
and 450i
Canada
RSS Gen and RSS-247 ISS1
USA
FCC Part 15 Class B
Europe
ETSI EN 302 502 v1.2.1
Canada
RSS Gen and RSS-247 ISS1
USA
FCC Part 15.247
3.5-GHz PMP/PTP 450
3.6-GHz PMP/PTP 450
900 MHz
21
21
PMP 450i
900 MHz support planned for future release.
Page 9-34
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Country specific radio regulations
DFS for 5 GHz Radios
Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) is a requirement in several countries and regions for 5 GHz
unlicensed systems to detect radar systems and avoid co-channel operation.
The details of DFS operation and channels available for each Country Code, including whether DFS
is active on the AP, SM, which DFS regulation apply, and any channel restrictions are shown in
Table 90 on page 9-35.
Table 90 Country & Bands DFS setting
AP
SM
W eather
Radar
NotchOut
ETSI EN 301 893
v1.6.1 DFS
No effect
No
ETSI EN 301 893
v1.6.1 DFS
No effect
No
5.4 GHz
ETSI EN 301 893
v1.8.1 DFS
ETSI EN 301 893
v1.8.1 DFS
Yes
5.8 GHz
ETSI EN 302 502
v1.2.1 DFS
ETSI EN 302 502
v1.2.1 DFS
Yes
2.4 GHz
No effect
No effect
No
5.4 GHz
FCC DFS
No effect
No
5.8-GHz
No effect
No effect
No
5.4 GHz
ETSI EN 301 893
v1.6.1 DFS
ETSI EN 301 893
v1.6.1 DFS
No
5.8 GHz
ETSI EN 302 502
v1.2.1 DFS
ETSI EN 302 502
v1.2.1 DFS
No
Region
Code
Country
Code
Band
North
America
Mexico
2.4 GHz
5.4 GHz
5.8 GHz
South
America
Brazil
5.4 GHz
5.8 GHz
Europe
OtherRegulatory
ETSI
Other-FCC
Other-ETSI
Page 9-35
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Country specific radio regulations
Country specific maximum transmit power
Maximum transmit power 4.9 GHz band
Table 91 Default combined transmit power per country – 4.9 GHz band
Countries
Device
Type
Antenna
Type
Sector
AP
Omni
USA,
Mexico,
Canada,
Other FCC
Flate plate
SM, BH
4ft parabolic
6ft parabolic
Brazil
Other
Any
Any
Any
Any
Conducted
Power Limit
(dBm )
EIRP Limit
(dBm )
5 MHz
24
40
10 MHz
24
40
20 MHz
23
39
5 MHz
24
35
10 MHz
24
36
20 MHz
23
35
5 MHz
24
51
10 MHz
24
51
20 MHz
23
50
5 MHz
24
52
10 MHz
24
55
20 MHz
23
56
5 MHz
24
52
10 MHz
24
55
20 MHz
23
58
5 MHz
23
54
10 MHz
27
57
20 MHz
27
60
Any
27
Channel BW
Page 9-36
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Country specific radio regulations
Maximum transmit power 5.1 GHz band
Table 92 Default combined transmit power per Country Code – 5.1 GHz band
Countries
USA,
Other FCC
Device
Type
Antenna
Type
AP
Sector
Omni
SM, BH
Flat plate
4ft parabolic
Other
Any
Any
Channel BW
Conducted
Power Limit
(dBm )
EIRP Limit
(dBm )
5 MHz
12
30
10 MHz
15
30
20 MHz
16
30
5 MHz
16
30
10 MHz
17
30
20 MHz
17
30
5 MHz
-2
30
10 MHz
30
20 MHz
30
5 MHz
30
10 MHz
30
20 MHz
30
Any
27
Maximum transmit power 5.4 GHz band
Table 93 Default combined transmit power per country – 5.4 GHz band
Countries
Brazil
Mexico
Other
Device
Type
Antenna
Type
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
Any
Channel BW
Conducted
Power Limit
(dBm )
EIRP Limit
(dBm )
10 MHz
19
30
20 MHz
23
30
10 MHz
30
20 MHz
30
Any
27
Page 9-37
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Country specific radio regulations
Maximum transmit power 5.8 GHz band
Table 94 Default combined transmit power per country – 5.8 GHz band
Countries
USA,
Canada,
Brazil,
Other FCC
Device
Type
Antenna
Type
AP
Sector,
Omni
SM, BH
Mexico
Other
Any
Any
Flat plate,
4ft parabolic,
6ft parabolic
Any
Any
Channel BW
Conducted
Power Limit
(dBm )
EIRP Limit
(dBm )
5 MHz
36
10 MHz
36
20 MHz
36
5 MHz
27
27
(26 for 5733 MHz
and below)
10 MHz
20 MHz
27
5 MHz
30
10 MHz
33
20 MHz
36
5 MHz
27
Page 9-38
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Country specific radio regulations
Country specific frequency range
Frequency range 4.9 GHz band
Table 95 Frequency range per country – 4.9 GHz band
Countries
Antenna
Type
USA,
Mexico,
Canada,
Other FCC
Any
Brazil
Any
Other
Any
Channel center Frequency limits
Channel BW
Lower
Upper
5 MHz
5156
5247.5
10 MHz
5160
5245
20 MHz
5169
5240
5 MHz
5156
5247.5
10 MHz
5160
5245
20 MHz
5169
5240
5 MHz
5152.5
5147.5
10 MHz
5155
5145
20 MHz
5110
5140
Page 9-39
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Country specific radio regulations
Frequency range 5.4 GHz band
Table 96 Frequency range per country – 5.4 GHz band
Countries
Brazil
Mexico
Antenna
Type
Any
Any
Channel center Frequency limits
Channel BW
Lower
10 MHz
5475
5720
20 MHz
5480
5715
5475
5595
5655
5720
5480
5590
5660
5710
5 MHz
5742.5
5722.5
10 MHz
5475
5720
20 MHz
5480
5715
10 MHz
20 MHz
Other
Any
Upper
Frequency range 5.8 GHz band
Table 97 Frequency range per country – 5.8 GHz band
Countries
Antenna
Type
USA,
Canada,
Brazil,
Other FCC
Any
Mexico
Any
Other
Any
Channel center Frequency limits
Channel BW
Lower
Upper
5 MHz
5730
5845
10 MHz
5730
5845
20 MHz
5735
5840
5 MHz
5727.5
5847.5
10 MHz
5730
5845
20 MHz
5735
5840
5 MHz
5727.5
5897.5
10 MHz
5730
5895
20 MHz
5735
5890
Page 9-40
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Country specific radio regulations
FCC specific information
FCC compliance testing
With GPS synchronization installed, the system has been tested for compliance to US (FCC)
specifications. It has been shown to comply with the limits for emitted spurious radiation for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules in the USA. These limits have been
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference. However the equipment
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to other radio communications. There is no
guarantee that interference does not occur in a particular installation.
Note
A Class B Digital Device is a device that is marketed for use in a residential
environment, notwithstanding use in commercial, business and industrial
environments.
Note
Notwithstanding that Cambium has designed (and qualified) the PMP/PTP 450(i)
products to generally meet the Class B requirement to minimize the potential for
interference, the PMP/PTP 450(i) product range is not marketed for use in a residential
environment.
FCC IDs
Table 98 US FCC IDs
FCC ID
Product
Frequency
Band
4.9 GHz
QWP50450I
5 GHz
AP, SM &
BH
5.1 GHz
5.8 GHz
Channel
Bandwidt
Frequencies
M axim um
Combined Tx
Output Power
5 MHz
4942.5 – 4987.5 MHz
24 dBm
10 MHz
4945.0 – 4985.0 MHz
24 dBm
20 MHz
4950.0 – 4980.0 MHz
23.5 dBm
5 MHz
5156.0 – 5247.5 MHz
16 dBm
10 MHz
5160.0 – 5164.75 MHz
17 dBm
20 MHz
5165.0 – 5245.0 MHz
19 dBm
5 MHz
5730.0 – 5845.0 MHz
28 dBm
10 MHz
5730.0 – 5845.0 MHz
28 dBm
20 MHz
5735.0 – 5840.0 MHz
28 dBm
Page 9-41
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Country specific radio regulations
FCC approved antenna list
The lists of antennas which have been approved for operation by the FCC are provided in:
•
Table 99 for 4.9 GHz,
•
Table 101 for 5.4 GHz
•
Table 102 for 5.8 GHz
Note
Any antenna of the same type and of gain equal or lower than the one approved by
the FCC can be used in the countries following the FCC rules.
Table 99 USA approved antenna list 4.9 GHz
Directivity
Directional
Sector
Omnidirectional
Type
M anufacturer
Reference
Stated
Gain (dBi)
Integrated flat
plate
Cambium
Networks
N/A
23.0
2 ft dual polarised
flat plate
Mars Antennas
MA-WA56-DP-28N
28.0
4 ft parabolic dual
polarised
Gabriel
Antennas
Dual QuickFire QFD4-49-N
33.7
6 ft Parabolic dual
polarised
Gabriel
Antennas
QuickFire QF6-49-N
37.2
Integrated 90°
sector flat plate
Cambium
Networks
N/A
16.0
90° sectorised
Cambium
Networks
#85009324001
17.0
60° sectorised
Cambium
Networks
#85009325001
17.0
Dual polar omnidirectional
KP
KPPA-5.7-DPOMA
13.0
Page 9-42
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Country specific radio regulations
Table 100 USA approved antenna list 5.1 and 5.2 GHz
Directivity
Directional
Sector
Omnidirectional
Type
M anufacturer
Reference
Stated
Gain (dBi)
Integrated flat
plate
Cambium
Networks
N/A
23.0
2ft dual polarised
flat plate
Mars Antennas
MA-WA56-DP-28N
28.5
4ft parabolic dual
polarised
Gabriel
Antennas
PX4F-52-N7A/A
34.5
Integrated 90°
sector flat plate
Cambium
Networks
N/A
16.0
90° sectorised
Cambium
Networks
#85009324001
17.0
Dual polar omnidirectional
KP
KPPA-5.7-DPOMA
13.0
Dual polar omnidirectional
Mars Antennas
MA-WO56-DP10
10.0
Table 101 USA approved antenna list 5.4 GHz
Directivity
Directional
Sector
Omnidirectional
Type
M anufacturer
Reference
Stated
Gain (dBi)
Integrated flat
plate
Cambium
Networks
N/A
23.0
2 ft dual polarised
flat plate
Mars Antennas
MA-WA56-DP-28N
28.5
2 ft dual polarised
parabolic
MTI
MT-486013-NVH
28.5
Integrated 90°
sector flat plate
Cambium
Networks
N/A
16.0
90° sectorised
Cambium
Networks
#85009324001
17.0
Dual polar omnidirectional
KP
KPPA-5.7-DPOMA
13.0
Dual polar omnidirectional
Mars Antennas
MA-WO56-DP10
10.0
Page 9-43
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Country specific radio regulations
Table 102 USA approved antenna list 5.8 GHz
Directivity
Directional
Sector
Omnidirectional
Type
M anufacturer
Reference
Stated
Gain (dBi)
Integrated flat
plate
Cambium
Networks
N/A
23.0
2 ft dual polarised
flat plate
Mars Antennas
MA-WA56-DP-28N
28.0
4 ft parabolic dual
polarised
Gabriel
Antennas
PX4F-52-N7A/A
35.3
6 ft Parabolic dual
polarised
Gabriel
Antennas
PX6F-52/A
38.1
Integrated 90°
sector flat plate
Cambium
Networks
N/A
16.0
90° sectorised
Cambium
Networks
#85009324001
17.0
60° sectorised
Cambium
Networks
#85009325001
17.0
Dual polar omnidirectional
KP
KPPA-5.7-DPOMA
13.0
Industry Canada (IC) specific information
4.9 GHz IC notification
The system has been approved under Industry Canada RSS-111 for Public Safety Agency usage.
The installer or operator is responsible for obtaining the appropriate site licenses before installing
or using the system.
Utilisation de la bande 4.9 GHz FCC et IC
Le système a été approuvé en vertu d’Industrie Canada RSS-111 pour l'utilisation par l'Agence de
la Sécurité publique. L'installateur ou l'exploitant est responsable de l'obtention des licences de
appropriées avant d'installer ou d'utiliser le système.
5.2 GHz and 5.4 GHz IC notification
This device complies with Industry Canada RSS-247. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Users
should be cautioned to take note that high power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning
they have priority) of 5250 – 5350 MHz and 5650 – 5850 MHz and these radars could cause
interference and/or damage to license-exempt local area networks (LELAN).
Page 9-44
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Country specific radio regulations
For the connectorized version of the product and in order to reduce potential radio interference to
other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically
radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that permitted by the regulations. The transmitted power
must be reduced to achieve this requirement.
Utilisation de la bande 5.2 and 5.4 GHz IC
Cet appareil est conforme à Industrie Canada RSS-247. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux
conditions suivantes: (1) Ce dispositif ne doit pas causer d'interférences nuisibles, et (2) Cet
appareil doit tolérer toute interférence reçue, y compris les interférences pouvant entraîner un
fonctionnement indésirable. Les utilisateurs doivent prendre garde au fait que les radars à haute
puissance sont considères comme les utilisateurs prioritaires de 5250 à 5350 MHz et 5650 à 5850
MHz et ces radars peuvent causer des interférences et / ou interférer avec un réseau local ne
nécessitant pas de licence.
Pour la version du produit avec antenne externe et afin de réduire le risque d'interférence avec
d'autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne et son gain doivent être choisis afin que la puissance
isotrope rayonnée équivalente (PIRE) ne soit pas supérieure à celle permise par la règlementation.
Il peut être nécessaire de réduire la puissance transmise doit être réduite pour satisfaire cette
exigence.
IC notification 5.8 GHz
RSS-GEN issue 3 (7.1.3) Licence-Exempt Radio Apparatus:
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
In Canada, high power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of the
5600 – 5650 MHz spectrum. These radars could cause interference or damage to license-exempt
local area network (LE-LAN) devices.
Utilisation de la bande 5.8 GHz IC
RSS-GEN issue 3 (7.1.3) appareil utilisant la bande sans licence:
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil
ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
Au Canada, les radars à haute puissance sont désignés comme utilisateurs principaux (ils
ont la priorité) dans la bande 5600 à 5650 MHz. Ces radars peuvent causer des
interférences et / ou interférer avec un réseau local ne nécessitant pas de licence.
Page 9-45
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Country specific radio regulations
IC certification numbers
Table 103 Industry Canada Certification Numbers
IC Cert.
Product
Frequenc
y Band
Frequencies
M axim um
Combined Tx
Output Power
5 MHz
4942.5 – 4987.5 MHz
24 dBm
10 MHz
4945.0 – 4985.0 MHz
24 dBm
5 GHz
20 MHz
4950.0 – 4980.0 MHz
23.5 dBm
AP, SM &
BHM
5 MHz
5730.0 – 5845.0 MHz
28 dBm
10 MHz
5730.0 – 5845.0 MHz
28 dBm
20 MHz
5735.0 – 5840.0 MHz
28 dBm
4.9 GHz
109AO50450I
(Pending)
Channel
Bandwidth
5.8 GHz
Canada approved antenna list
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a
type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce
potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain must be so chosen that
the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that necessary for successful
communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut fonctionner
avec une antenne d'un type et d'un gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour l'émetteur par
Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage radioélectrique à l'intention des
autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d'antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope
rayonnée équivalente (PIRE) ne dépasse pas l'intensité nécessaire à l'établissement d'une
communication satisfaisante.
This radio transmitter (identify the device by certification number) has been approved by Industry
Canada to operate with the antenna types listed in Country specific radio regulations, Industry
Canada (IC) , Table 104 with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for
each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the
maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
Le présent émetteur radio (identifier le dispositif par son numéro de certification) a été approuvé
par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne énumérés dans la section Country
specific radio regulations, Industry Canada (IC) , Table 104 et ayant un gain admissible maximal et
l'impédance requise pour chaque type d'antenne. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste,
ou dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal indiqué, sont strictement interdits pour
l'exploitation de l'émetteur.
Page 9-46
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Country specific radio regulations
Table 104 Canada approved antenna list 4.9 and 5.8 GHz
Antenna
type
Directional
Sector
Omnidirectional
Description
M anufactur
er
Integrated flat
plate
Cambium
Networks
N/A
2 ft dual
polarised flat
plate
MARS
Antennas
MA-WA56-DP-28N
4 ft parabolic
dual polarised
Andrews
Antennas
PX4F-52-N7A/A
6 ft Parabolic
dual polarised
Gabriel
Antennas
QF6-49-N
Integrated
90° sector flat
plate
Cambium
Networks
N/A
90°sector
Cambium
Networks
85009324001
60° sectorised
Cambium
Networks
#85009325001
Omnidirectional
KP Antennas
KPPA-5.7-DPOMA
Omnidirectional
MARS
Antennas
MA-WO56-DP10
Reference
Page 9-47
Gain (dBi)
4.9 GHz
5.8 GHz
23
23
28.5
28
N/A
35.3
37.2
N/A
16
16
17
17
16
16
13
13
10
10
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Country specific radio regulations
Table 105 Canada approved antenna list 5.2 and 5.4 GHz
Directivity
Directional
Sector
Omnidirectional
Type
M anufacturer
Reference
Stated
Gain (dBi)
Integrated flat
plate
Cambium
Networks
N/A
23.0
2ft dual polarised
flat plate
Mars Antennas
MA-WA56-DP-28N
28.5
2ft dual polarised
parabolic
MTI
MT-486013-NVH
28.5
Integrated 90°
sector flat plate
Cambium
Networks
N/A
16.0
90° sectorised
Cambium
Networks
#85009324001
17.0
Dual polar omnidirectional
KP
KPPA-5.7-DPOMA
13.0
Dual polar omnidirectional
Mars Antennas
MA-WO56-DP10
10.0
Page 9-48
Chapter 9: Reference Information
Equipment Disposal
Equipment Disposal
Waste (Disposal) of Electronic and Electric
Equipment
Waste
(Disposal)
of Electronic
and Electric
Equipment
Please do not dispose of Electronic and Electric Equipment or
Electronic and Electric Accessories with your household waste.
In some countries or regions, collection systems have been set
up to handle waste of electrical and electronic equipment. In
European Union countries, please contact your local equipment
supplier representative or service center for information about
the waste collection system in your country.
Page 9-49
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
This chapter contains procedures for identifying and correcting faults in a PMP/PTP 450(i) link.
These procedures can be performed either on a newly installed link, or on an operational link if
communication is lost, or after a lightning strike.
The following topics are described in this chapter:
•
General troubleshooting procedure on page 10-2
•
Troubleshooting procedures on page 10-5
•
Power-up troubleshooting on page 10-14
•
Registration and connectivity troubleshooting on page 10-15
Page 10-1
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
General troubleshooting procedure
General troubleshooting procedure
General planning for troubleshooting
Effective troubleshooting depends in part on measures that you take before you experience
trouble in your network. Cambium recommends the following measures for each site:
•
Identify troubleshooting tools that are available at your site (such as a protocol analyzer).
•
Identify commands and other sources that can capture baseline data for the site. These may
include:
Ping
Tracert or traceroute
Link Capacity Test results
Throughput data
Configuration tab captures
Status tab captures
Session logs
Web browser used
•
Start a log for the site.
•
Include the following information in the log:
•
Operating procedures
Site-specific configuration records
Network topology
Software releases, boot versions and FPGA firmware versions
Types of hardware deployed
Site-specific troubleshooting processes
Escalation procedures
Capture baseline data into the log from the sources listed above
Page 10-2
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
General troubleshooting procedure
General fault isolation process
Effective troubleshooting also requires an effective fault isolation methodology that includes the
following:
•
Attempting to isolate the problem to the level of a system, subsystem, or link, such as
AP to SM
AP to CMM4
AP to GPS
Backhaul(BH)
Backhaul(BH) to CMM4
Power
•
Researching Event Logs of the involved equipment
•
Interpreting messages in the Event Log
•
Answering the questions listed in the following sections.
•
Reversing the last previous corrective attempt before proceeding to the next.
•
Performing only one corrective attempt at a time.
Questions to help isolate the problem
When a problem occurs, attempt to answer the following questions:
•
•
What is the history of the problem?
Have we changed something recently?
Have we seen other symptoms before this?
How wide-spread is the symptom?
Is the problem on only a single SM? (If so, focus on that SM.)
Is the problem on multiple SMs? If so
is the problem on one AP in the cluster? (If so, focus on that AP)
is the problem on multiple, but not all, APs in the cluster? (If so, focus on those APs)
is the problem on all APs in the cluster? (If so, focus on the CMM4 and the GPS signal.)
•
Based on data in the Event Log
does the problem correlate to External Hard Resets with no WatchDog timers? (If so, this
indicates a loss of power. Correct your power problem.)
is intermittent connectivity indicated? (If so, verify your configuration, power level, cables
and connections and the speed duplex of both ends of the link).
does the problem correlate to loss-of-sync events?
•
Are connections made via shielded cables?
•
Does the GPS antenna have an unobstructed view of the entire horizon?
•
Has the site grounding been verified?
Page 10-3
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
General troubleshooting procedure
Secondary Steps
After preliminary fault isolation is completed through the above steps, follow these:
•
Check the Canopy knowledge base (https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/forum) to find
whether other network operators have encountered a similar problem.
•
Proceed to any appropriate set of diagnostic steps. These are organized as follows:
Module has lost or does not establish connectivity on page 10-5
NAT/DHCP-configured SM has lost or does not establish connectivity on page 10-7
SM Does Not Register to an AP on page 10-9
Module has lost or does not gain sync on page 10-10
Module does not establish Ethernet connectivity on page 10-11
CMM4 does not pass proper GPS sync to connected modules on page 10-12
Module Software Cannot be Upgraded on page 10-13
Module Functions Properly, Except Web Interface Became Inaccessible on page 10-13
Page 10-4
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting procedures
Troubleshooting procedures
Proceed to any appropriate set of diagnostic steps. These are organized as follows:
•
Module has lost or does not establish connectivity on page 10-5
•
NAT/DHCP-configured SM has lost or does not establish connectivity on page 10-7
•
SM Does Not Register to an AP on page 10-9
•
Module has lost or does not gain sync on page 10-10
•
Module does not establish Ethernet connectivity on page 10-11
•
CMM4 does not pass proper GPS sync to connected modules on page 10-12
•
Module Software Cannot be Upgraded on page 10-13
•
Module Functions Properly, Except Web Interface Became Inaccessible on page 10-13
Module has lost or does not establish connectivity
To troubleshoot a loss of connectivity, perform the following steps:
Procedure 4 Troubleshooting loss of connectivity
Isolate the end user/SM from peripheral equipment and variables such as routers,
switches and firewalls.
Set up the minimal amount of equipment.
On each end of the link:
•
Check the cables and connections.
•
Verify that the cable/connection scheme—straight-through or crossover—is
correct.
•
Verify that the LED labeled LNK is green.
•
Access the General Status tab in the Home page of the module.
•
Verify that the SM is registered.
•
Verify that Received Power Level is -87 dBm or higher.
•
Access the IP tab in the Configuration page of the module.
•
Verify that IP addresses match and are in the same subnet.
•
If RADIUS authentication is configured, ensure that the RADIUS server is
operational
Page 10-5
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting procedures
On the SM end of the link:
•
Verify that the PC that is connected to the SM is correctly configured to obtain an
IP address through DHCP.
•
Execute ipconfig (Windows) or ifconfig (linux)
•
Verify that the PC has an assigned IP address.
On each end of the link:
•
Access the General tab in the Configuration page of each module.
•
Verify that the setting for Link Speeds (or negotiation) matches that of the
other module.
•
Access the Radio tab in the Configuration page of each module.
•
Verify that the Radio Frequency Carrier setting is checked in the Custom
Radio Frequency Scan Selection List.
•
Verify that the Color Code setting matches that of the other module.
•
Access the browser LAN settings (for example, at
Tools > Internet Options > Connections > LAN Settings in Internet
Explorer).
•
Verify that none of the settings are selected.
•
Access the Link Capacity Test tab in the Tools page of the module.
•
Perform a link test
•
Verify that the link test results show efficiency greater than 90% in both the
uplink and downlink
•
Execute ping.
Verify that no packet loss was experienced.
Verify that response times are not significantly greater than
§
4 ms from AP to SM
§
15 ms from SM to AP
Replace any cables that you suspect may be causing the problem.
Note
A ping size larger than 1494 Bytes to a module times out and fails.
However, a ping of this size or larger to a system that is behind a
Canopy module typically succeeds. It is generally advisable to ping
such a system, since Canopy handles that ping with the same priority
as is given all other transport traffic. The results are unaffected by ping
size and by the load on the Canopy module that brokers this traffic.
After connectivity has been re-established, reinstall network elements and variables
that you removed in Step 1.
Page 10-6
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting procedures
NAT/DHCP-configured SM has lost or does not
establish connectivity
Before troubleshooting this problem, identify the NAT/DHCP configuration from the following list:
•
NAT with DHCP Client (DHCP selected as the Connection Type of the WAN interface) and
DHCP Server
•
NAT with DHCP Client (DHCP selected as the Connection Type of the WAN interface)
•
NAT with DHCP Server
•
NAT without DHCP
To troubleshoot a loss of connectivity for a SM configured for NAT/DHCP, perform the following
steps.
Page 10-7
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting procedures
Procedure 5 Troubleshooting loss of connectivity for NAT/DHCP-configured SM
Isolate the end user/SM from peripheral equipment and variables such as routers,
switches and firewalls.
Set up the minimal amount of equipment.
On each end of the link:
•
Check the cables and connections.
•
Verify that the cable/connection scheme—straight-through or crossover—is
correct.
•
Verify that the LED labeled LNK is green.
At the SM:
•
Access the NAT Table tab in the Logs web page.
•
Verify that the correct NAT translations are listed.
RESULT: NAT is eliminated as a possible cause if these translations are correct.
If this SM is configured for NAT with DHCP, then at the SM:
•
Execute ipconfig (Windows) or ifconfig (Linux)
•
Verify that the PC has an assigned IP address.
•
If the PC does not have an assigned IP address, then
enter ipconfig /release “Adapter Name”.
enter ipconfig /renew “Adapter Name”.
reboot the PC.
after the PC has completed rebooting, execute ipconfig
if the PC has an assigned IP address, then
access the NAT DHCP Statistics tab in the Statistics web page of the SM.
verify that DHCP is operating as configured.
After connectivity has been re-established, reinstall network elements and variables
that you removed in Step 1.
Page 10-8
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting procedures
SM Does Not Register to an AP
To troubleshoot a SM failing to register to an AP, perform the following steps.
Procedure 6 Troubleshooting SM failing to register to an AP
Access the Radio tab in the Configuration page of the SM.
Note the Color Code of the SM.
Access the Radio tab in the Configuration page of the AP.
Verify that the Color Code of the AP matches that of the SM.
Note the Radio Frequency Carrier of the AP.
Verify that the value of the RF Frequency Carrier of the AP is selected in the
Custom Radio Frequency Scan Selection List parameter in the SM.
In the AP, verify that the M ax Range parameter is set to a distance slightly greater
than the distance between the AP and the furthest SM that must register to this AP.
Verify that no obstruction significantly penetrates the Fresnel zone of the attempted
link.
Access the General Status tab in the Home page of each module.
10
Remove the bottom cover of the SM to expose the LEDs.
11
Power cycle the SM.
RESULT: Approximately 25 seconds after the power cycle, the green LED labeled
LNK must light to indicate that the link has been established. If the orange LED
labeled SYN is lit instead, then the SM is in Alignment mode because the SM failed
to establish the link.
12
If the AP is configured to require authentication, ensure proper configuration of
RADIUS or Pre-shared AP key.
13
In this latter case and if the SM has encountered no customer-inflicted damage,
then request an RMA for the SM.
Page 10-9
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting procedures
Module has lost or does not gain sync
To troubleshoot a loss of sync, perform the following steps.
Procedure 7 Troubleshooting loss of sync
Access the Event Log tab in the Home page of the SM
Check for messages with the following format:
RcvFrmNum =
ExpFrmNum =
If these messages are present, check the Event Log tab of another SM that is
registered to the same AP for messages of the same type.
If the Event Log of this second SM does not contain these messages, then the fault
is isolated to the first SM.
If the Event Log page of this second SM contains these messages, access the GPS
Status page of the AP.
If the Satellites Tracked field in the GPS Status page of the AP indicates fewer
than 4 or the Pulse Status field does not indicate Generating Sync, check the GPS
Status page of another AP in the same AP cluster for these indicators. GPS signal
acquisition must not take longer than 5 minutes from unit startup.
If these indicators are present in the second AP, then:
•
Verify that the GPS antenna still has an unobstructed view of the entire horizon.
•
Visually inspect the cable and connections between the GPS antenna and the
CMM4. If this cable is not shielded, replace the cable with shielded cable
If these indicators are not present in the second AP, visually inspect the cable and
connections between the CMM4 and the AP antenna. If this cable is not shielded,
replace the cable with shielded cable.
Page 10-10
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting procedures
Module does not establish Ethernet connectivity
To troubleshoot a loss of Ethernet connectivity, perform the following steps:
Procedure 8 Troubleshooting loss of Ethernet connectivity
Verify that the connector crimps on the Ethernet cable are not loose.
Verify that the Ethernet cable is not damaged.
If the Ethernet cable connects the module to a network interface card (NIC), verify
that the cable is pinned out as a straight-through cable.
If the Ethernet cable connects the module to a hub, switch, or router, verify that the
cable is pinned out as a crossover cable.
Verify that the Ethernet port to which the cable connects the module is set to autonegotiate speed.
Verify VLAN configuration in the network, which may cause loss of module access
if the accessing device is on a separate VLAN from the radio.
Power cycle the module.
RESULT: Approximately 25 seconds after the power cycle, the green LED labeled
LNK must light up to indicate that the link has been established. If the orange LED
labeled SYN is lit instead, then the module is in Alignment mode because the
module failed to establish the link.
In this latter case and if the module has encountered no customer-inflicted damage,
then request an RMA for the module.
Page 10-11
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting procedures
CMM4 does not pass proper GPS sync to connected
modules
If the Event Log tabs in all connected modules contain Loss of GPS Sync Pulse messages, perform
the following steps.
Procedure 9 Troubleshooting CMM4 not passing sync
Verify that the GPS antenna has an unobstructed view of the entire horizon.
Verify that the GPS coaxial cable meets specifications.
Verify that the GPS sync cable meets specifications for wiring and length.
If the web pages of connected modules indicate any of the following, then find and
eliminate the source of noise that is being coupled into the GPS sync cable:
•
•
In the GPS Status page:
anomalous number of Satellites Tracked (greater than 12, for example)
incorrect reported Latitude and/or Longitude of the antenna
In the Event Log page:
garbled GPS messages
large number of Acquired GPS Sync Pulse messages
GPS signal acquisition must not take longer than 5 minutes from unit startup.
If these efforts fail to resolve the problem, then request an RMA for the CMM4.
Page 10-12
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting procedures
Module Software Cannot be Upgraded
If your attempt to upgrade the software of a module fails, perform the following steps.
Procedure 10 Troubleshooting an unsuccessful software upgrade
Download the latest issue of the target release and the associated release notes.
Verify that the latest version of CNUT is installed.
Compare the files used in the failed attempt to the newly downloaded software.
Compare the procedure used in the failed attempt to the procedure in the newly
downloaded release notes.
If these comparisons reveal a difference, retry the upgrade, this time with the
newer file or newer procedure.
If, during attempts to upgrade the FPGA firmware, the following message is
repeatable, then request an RMA for the module:
Error code 6, unrecognized device
Module Functions Properly, Except Web Interface
Became Inaccessible
If a module continues to pass traffic and the SNMP interface to the module continues to function,
but the web interface to the module does not display, perform the following steps:
Procedure 11 Restoring web management GUI access
Enter telnet DottedIPAddress .
RESULT: A telnet session to the module is invoked.
At the Login prompt, enter root.
At the Password prompt, enter PasswordIfConfigured .
At the Telnet +> prompt, enter reset.
RESULT: The web interface is accessible again and this telnet connection is closed.
Note
The module may also be rebooted via an SNMP-based NMS (Wireless
Manager, for example)
If the issue persists, turn off any SNMP-based network/radio monitoring software
and repeat steps 1-4.
Page 10-13
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Power-up troubleshooting
Power-up troubleshooting
Module
does
not
power
O N
Is
Module’s
power
LED
O N?
Yes
No
Is
the
LED
a lways
r ed?
Ethernet
c able
repaired
Yes
Yes
Is
there
A C
power
going
to
t he
s upply?
Test
cable,
use
known
good
c able.
Could
t he
r adio
be
in
default
mode
Switch
O N
A C
m ains
power
No
Cable
w ire
and
pin
out
corrected
No
No
Yes
Test
cable?
Connect
to
known
good
module
Yes
Cable
length
within
300
m eters
No
Is
cable
length
<
300
m eters?
Is
module
getting
powered
ON?
Yes
Connect
to
a
known
power
supply
Yes
No
Is
the
module’s
red
L ED
ON?
No
Yes
Module
is
powered
ON
Page 10-14
Contact
Cambium
Support
for
RMA
Yes
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Registration and connectivity troubleshooting
Registration and connectivity
troubleshooting
SM/BMS Registration
If no SMs are registered to this AP, then the Session Status tab displays the simple message No
sessions. In this case, try the following steps.
More finely aim the SM or SMs toward the AP.
Recheck the Session Status tab of the AP for the presence of LUIDs.
If still no LUIDs are reported on the Session Status tab, click the Configuration
button on the left side of the Hom e page.
RESULT: The AP responds by opening the AP Configuration page.
Click the Radio tab.
Find the Color Code parameter and note the setting.
In the same sequence as you did for the AP directly under Configuring Link for
Test on Page 5-15, connect the SM to a computing device and to power.
On the left side of the SM Home page, click the Configuration button.
RESULT: The Configuration page of the SM opens.
Click the Radio tab.
If the transmit frequency of the AP is not selected in the Custom Radio
Frequency Scan Selection List parameter, select the frequency that matches.
10
If the Color Code parameter on this page is not identical to the Color Code
parameter you noted from the AP, change one of them so that they match.
11
At the bottom of the Radio tab for the SM, click the Save Changes button.
12
Click the Reboot button.
13
Allow several minutes for the SM to reboot and register to the AP.
14
Return to the computing device that is connected to the AP.
15
Recheck the Session Status tab of the AP for the presence of LUIDs.
Page 10-15
Glossary
Term
Definition
10Base-T
Technology in Ethernet communications that can deliver 10 Mb of
data across 328 feet (100 meters) of CAT 5 cable.
169.254.0.0
Gateway IP address default in Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP
network modules.
169.254.1.1
IP address default in Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP network
modules.
255.255.0.0
Subnet mask default in Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP
network modules and in Microsoft and Apple operating systems.
802.3
An IEEE standard that defines the contents of frames that are
transferred through Ethernet connections. Each of these frames
contains a preamble, the address to which the frame is sent, the
address that sends the frame, the length of the data to expect, the
data, and a checksum to validate that no contents were lost.
Access Point Cluster
Two to six Access Point Modules that together distribute network or
Internet services to a community of subscribers. Each Access Point
Module covers a 60° or 90° sector. This cluster covers as much as
360°. Also known as AP cluster.
Access Point Module
Also known as AP. One module that distributes network or Internet
services in a 60° or 90° sector.
ACT/4
Second-from-left LED in the module. In the operating mode, this
LED is lit when data activity is present on the Ethernet link.
Address Resolution
Protocol
Protocol defined in RFC 826 to allow a network element to correlate
a host IP address to the Ethernet address of the host. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc826.html.
Aggregate Throughput
The sum of the throughputs in the uplink and the downlink.
AP
Access Point Module. One module that distributes network or
Internet services to subscriber modules.
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol. A protocol defined in RFC 826 to allow
a network element to correlate a host IP address to the Ethernet
address of the host. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc826.html.
APs MIB
Management Information Base file that defines objects that are
specific to the Access Point Module. See also Management
Page I
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Term
Registration and connectivity troubleshooting
Definition
Information Base.
ASN.1
Abstract Syntax Notation One language. The format of the text files
that compose the Management Information Base.
Attenuation
Reduction of signal strength caused by the travel from the
transmitter to the receiver, and caused by any object between. In
the absence of objects between, a signal that has a short
wavelength experiences a high degree of attenuation nevertheless.
BER
Bit Error Rate. The ratio of incorrect data received to correct data
received.
Bit Error Rate
Ratio of incorrect data received to correct data received.
Box MIB
Management Information Base file that defines module-level
objects. See also Management Information Base.
Bridge
Network element that uses the physical address (not the logical
address) of another to pass data. The bridge passes the data to
either the destination address, if found in the simple routing table,
or to all network segments other than the one that transmitted the
data. Modules are Layer 2 bridges except that, where NAT is
enabled for an SM, the SM is a Layer 3 switch. Compare to Switch
and Router, and see also NAT.
Buckets
Theoretical data repositories that can be filled at preset rates or
emptied when preset conditions are experienced, such as when
data is transferred.
Burst
Preset amount limit of data that may be continuously transferred.
CAT 5 Cable
Cable that delivers Ethernet communications from module to
module. Later modules auto-sense whether this cable is wired in a
straight-through or crossover scheme.
CIR
Committed Information Rate. For an SM or specified group of SMs,
a level of bandwidth that can be guaranteed to never fall below a
specified minimum (unless oversubscribed). In the Cambium
implementation, this is controlled by the Low Priority Uplink CIR,
Low Priority Downlink CIR, High Priority Uplink CIR, and High
Priority Downlink CIR parameters.
Cluster Management
Module
Module that provides power, GPS timing, and networking
connections for an AP cluster. Also known as CMM4.
CMM
Cluster Management Module. A module that provides power, GPS
timing, and networking connections for an Access Point cluster.
CodePoint
See DiffServ.
Color Code Field
Module parameter that identifies the other modules with which
Page II
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Term
Registration and connectivity troubleshooting
Definition
communication is allowed. The range of valid values is 0 to 255.
Community String Field
Control string that allows a network management station to access
MIB information about the module.
Country Code
A parameter that offers multiple fixed selections, each of which
automatically implements frequency band range restrictions for the
selected country. Units shipped to countries other than the United
States must be configured with the corresponding Region Code and
Country Code to comply with local regulatory requirements.
CRCError Field
This field displays how many CRC errors occurred on the Ethernet
controller.
Data Encryption Standard
Over-the-air link option that uses secret 56-bit keys and 8 parity bits.
Data Encryption Standard (DES) performs a series of bit
permutations, substitutions, and recombination operations on
blocks of data.
Demilitarized Zone
Internet Protocol area outside of a firewall. Defined in RFC 2647. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2647.html.
DES
Data Encryption Standard. An over-the-air link option that uses
secret 56-bit keys and 8 parity bits. DES performs a series of bit
permutations, substitutions, and recombination operations on
blocks of data.
DFS
See Dynamic Frequency Selection
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, defined in RFC 2131. Protocol
that enables a device to be assigned a new IP address and TCP/IP
parameters, including a default gateway, whenever the device
reboots. Thus DHCP reduces configuration time, conserves IP
addresses, and allows modules to be moved to a different network
within the system. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2131.html. See
also Static IP Address Assignment.
DiffServ
Differentiated Services, consistent with RFC 2474. A byte in the type
of service (TOS) field of packets whose values correlates to the
channel on which the packet should be sent. The value is a numeric
code point. Cambium modules map each of 64 code points to
values of 0 through 7. Three of these code points have fixed values,
and the remaining 61 are settable. Values of 0 through 3 map to the
low-priority channel; 4 through 7 to the high-priority channel. The
mappings are the same as 802.1p VLAN priorities. (However,
configuring DiffServ does not automatically enable the VLAN
feature.) Among the settable parameters, the values are set in the
AP for all downlinks within the sector and in the SM for each uplink.
Page III
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Registration and connectivity troubleshooting
Term
Definition
DMZ
Demilitarized Zone as defined in RFC 2647. An Internet Protocol area
outside of a firewall. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2647.html.
Dynamic Frequency
Selection
A requirement in certain countries and regions for systems to detect
interference from other systems, notably radar systems, and to
avoid co-channel operation with these systems.
Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol
See DHCP.
Electronic Serial Number
Hardware address that the factory assigns to the module for
identification in the Data Link layer interface of the Open Systems
Interconnection system. This address serves as an electronic serial
number. Same as MAC Address.
ESN
Electronic Serial Number. The hardware address that the factory
assigns to the module for identification in the Data Link layer
interface of the Open Systems Interconnection system. This address
serves as an electronic serial number. Same as MAC Address.
Ethernet Protocol
Any of several IEEE standards that define the contents of frames
that are transferred from one network element to another through
Ethernet connections.
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
Fade Margin
The difference between strength of the received signal and the
strength that the receiver requires for maintaining a reliable link. A
higher fade margin is characteristic of a more reliable link. Standard
operating margin.
FCC
Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.A.
Field-programmable Gate
Array
Array of logic, relational data, and wiring data that is factory
programmed and can be reprogrammed.
File Transfer Protocol
Utility that transfers of files through TCP (Transport Control
Protocol) between computing devices that do not operate on the
same platform. Defined in RFC 959. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc959.html.
FPGA
Field-programmable Gate Array. An array of logic, relational data,
and wiring data that is factory programmed and can be
reprogrammed.
Free Space Path Loss
Signal attenuation that is naturally caused by atmospheric
conditions and by the distance between the antenna and the
receiver.
Fresnel Zone
Space in which no object should exist that can attenuate, diffract, or
reflect a transmitted signal before the signal reaches the target
Page IV
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Term
Registration and connectivity troubleshooting
Definition
receiver.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol, defined in RFC 959. Utility that transfers of
files through TCP (Transport Control Protocol) between computing
devices that do not operate on the same platform. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc959.html.
Global Positioning
System
Network of satellites that provides absolute time to networks on
earth, which use the time signal to synchronize transmission and
reception cycles (to avoid interference) and to provide reference for
troubleshooting activities.
GPS
Global Positioning System. A network of satellites that provides
absolute time to networks on earth, which use the time signal to
synchronize transmission and reception cycles (to avoid
interference) and to provide reference for troubleshooting activities.
GPS/3
Third-from-left LED in the module. In the operating mode for an
Access Point Module, this LED is continuously lit as the module
receives sync pulse. In the operating mode for a Subscriber, this
LED flashes on and off to indicate that the module is not registered.
GUI
Graphical user interface.
High-priority Channel
Channel that supports low-latency traffic (such as Voice over IP)
over low-latency traffic (such as standard web traffic and file
downloads). To recognize the latency tolerance of traffic, this
channel reads the IPv4 Type of Service DiffServ Control Point
(DSCP) bits. Enabling the high-priority channel reduces the
maximum number of SMs that can be served in the sector.
HTTP
Hypertext Transfer Protocol, used to make the Internet resources
available on the World Wide Web. Defined in RFC 2068. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2068.html.
HTTPS
Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS)
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocols defined in RFC 792, used to
identify Internet Protocol (IP)-level problems and to allow IP links to
be tested. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc792.html.
IP
Internet Protocol defined in RFC 791. The Network Layer in the
TCP/IP protocol stack. This protocol is applied to addressing,
routing, and delivering, and re-assembling data packets into the
Data Link layer of the protocol stack. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc791.html.
IP Address
32-bit binary number that identifies a network element by both
network and host. See also Subnet Mask.
Page V
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Registration and connectivity troubleshooting
Term
Definition
IPv4
Traditional version of Internet Protocol, which defines 32-bit fields
for data transmission.
ISM
Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment radio frequency band,
in the 900-MHz, 2.4-GHz, and 5.8-GHz ranges.
L2TP over IPSec
Level 2 Tunneling Protocol over IP Security. One of several virtual
private network (VPN) implementation schemes. Regardless of
whether Subscriber Modules have the Network Address Translation
feature (NAT) enabled, they support VPNs that are based on this
protocol.
Late Collision Field
This field displays how many late collisions occurred on the
Ethernet controller. A normal collision occurs during the first 512
bits of the frame transmission. A collision that occurs after the first
512 bits is considered a late collision. A late collision is a serious
network problem because the frame being transmitted is discarded.
A late collision is most commonly caused by a mismatch between
duplex configurations at the ends of a link segment.
Line of Sight
Wireless path (not simply visual path) direct from module to
module. The path that results provides both ideal aim and an ideal
Fresnel zone.
LNK/5
Furthest left LED in the module. In the operating mode, this LED is
continuously lit when the Ethernet link is present. In the aiming
mode for a Subscriber Module, this LED is part of a bar graph that
indicates the quality of the RF link.
Logical Unit ID
Final octet of the 4-octet IP address of the module.
LOS
Line of sight. The wireless path (not simply visual path) direct from
module to module. The path that results provides both ideal aim
and an ideal Fresnel zone.
LUID
Logical Unit ID. The final octet of the 4-octet IP address of the
module.
MAC Address
Media Access Control address. The hardware address that the
factory assigns to the module for identification in the Data Link layer
interface of the Open Systems Interconnection system. This address
serves as an electronic serial number.
Management Information
Base
Space that allows a program (agent) in the network to relay
information to a network monitor about the status of defined
variables (objects).
Maximum Information
Rate (MIR)
The cap applied to the bandwidth of an SM or specified group of
SMs. In the Cambium implementation, this is controlled by the
Sustained Uplink Data Rate, Uplink Burst Allocation, Sustained
Page VI
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Term
Registration and connectivity troubleshooting
Definition
Downlink Data Rate, and Downlink Burst Allocation parameters.
MIB
Management Information Base. Space that allows a program
(agent) in the network to relay information to a network monitor
about the status of defined variables (objects).
MIR
See Maximum Information Rate.
NAT
Network Address Translation defined in RFC 1631. A scheme that
isolates Subscriber Modules from the Internet. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1631.html.
NEC
National Electrical Code. The set of national wiring standards that
are enforced in the U.S.A.
NetBIOS
Protocol defined in RFC 1001 and RFC 1002 to support an
applications programming interface in TCP/IP. This interface allows
a computer to transmit and receive data with another host computer
on the network. RFC 1001 defines the concepts and methods. RFC
1002 defines the detailed specifications. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1001.html and
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1002.html.
Network Address
Translation
Scheme that defines the Access Point Module as a proxy server to
isolate registered Subscriber Modules from the Internet. Defined in
RFC 1631. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1631.html.
Network Management
Station
See NMS.
NMS
Network Management Station. A monitor device that uses Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP) to control, gather, and
report information about predefined network variables (objects).
See also Simple Network Management Protocol.
Default Mode
Device that enables the operator to regain control of a module that
has been locked by the No Remote Access feature, the 802.3 Link
Disable feature, or a password or IP address that cannot be recalled.
This device can be either fabricated on site or ordered.
PMP
See Point-to-Multipoint Protocol.
Point-to-Multipoint
Protocol
Defined in RFC 2178, which specifies that data that originates from a
central network element can be received by all other network
elements, but data that originates from a non-central network
element can be received by only the central network element. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2178.html. Also referenced as PMP.
PPPoE
Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet. Supported on SMs for
operators who use PPPoE in other parts of their network operators
Page VII
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Term
Registration and connectivity troubleshooting
Definition
who want to deploy PPPoE to realize per-subscriber authentication,
metrics, and usage control.
PPS
Packet Per Second
PPTP
Point to Point Tunneling Protocol. One of several virtual private
network implementations. Regardless of whether the Network
Address Translation (NAT) feature enabled, Subscriber Modules
support VPNs that are based on this protocol.
Protective Earth
Connection to earth (which has a charge of 0 volts). Also known as
ground.
Proxy Server
Network computer that isolates another from the Internet. The
proxy server communicates for the other computer, and sends
replies to only the appropriate computer, which has an IP address
that is not unique or not registered.
Radio Signal Strength
Indicator
Relative measure of the strength of a received signal. An acceptable
link displays a Radio Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value of
greater than 700.
Reflection
Change of direction and reduction of amplitude of a signal that
encounters an object larger than the wavelength. Reflection may
cause an additional copy of the wavelength to arrive after the
original, unobstructed wavelength arrives. This causes partial
cancellation of the signal and may render the link unacceptable.
However, in some instances where the direct signal cannot be
received, the reflected copy may be received and render an
otherwise unacceptable link acceptable.
Region Code
A parameter that offers multiple fixed selections, each of which
automatically implements frequency band range restrictions for the
selected region. Units shipped to regions other than the United
States must be configured with the corresponding Region Code to
comply with local regulatory requirements.
RF
Radio frequency. How many times each second a cycle in the
antenna occurs, from positive to negative and back to positive
amplitude.
RJ-12
Standard cable that is typically used for telephone line or modem
connection.
RJ-45
Standard cable that is typically used for Ethernet connection. This
cable may be wired as straight-through or as crossover. Later
modules auto-sense whether the cable is straight-through or
crossover.
Router
Network element that uses the logical (IP) address of another to
Page VIII
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Term
Registration and connectivity troubleshooting
Definition
pass data to only the intended recipient. Compare to Switch and
Bridge.
RSSI
Radio Signal Strength Indicator. A relative measure of the strength
of a received signal. An acceptable link displays an RSSI value of
greater than 700.
Self-interference
Interference with a module from another module in the same
network.
Simple Network
Management Protocol
Standard that is used for communications between a program
(agent) in the network and a network management station
(monitor). Defined in RFC 1157. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1157.html.
SM
Customer premises equipment (CPE) device that extends network or
Internet services by communication with an Access Point Module or
an Access Point cluster.
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol, defined in RFC 1157.
SNMPv3
SNMP version 3
SNMP Trap
Capture of information that informs the network monitor through
Simple Network Management Protocol of a monitored occurrence in
the module.
Static IP Address
Assignment
Assignment of Internet Protocol address that can be changed only
manually. Thus static IP address assignment requires more
configuration time and consumes more of the available IP
addresses than DHCP address assignment does. RFC 2050 provides
guidelines for the static allocation of IP addresses. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2050.html. See also DHCP.
Subnet Mask
32-bit binary number that filters an IP address to reveal what part
identifies the network and what part identifies the host. The number
of subnet mask bits that are set to 1 indicates how many leading
bits of the IP address identify the network. The number of subnet
mask bits that are set 0 indicate how many trailing bits of the IP
address identify the host.
Subscriber Module
Customer premises equipment (CPE) device that extends network or
Internet services by communication with an Access Point Module or
an Access Point cluster.
Sustained Data Rate
Preset rate limit of data transfer.
Switch
Network element that uses the port that is associated with the
physical address of another to pass data to only the intended
recipient. Compare to Bridge and Router.
Page IX
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Registration and connectivity troubleshooting
Term
Definition
Sync
GPS (Global Positioning System) absolute time, which is passed
from one module to another. Sync enables timing that prevents
modules from transmitting or receiving interference. Sync also
provides correlative time stamps for troubleshooting efforts.
TCP
Alternatively known as Transmission Control Protocol or Transport
Control Protocol. The Transport Layer in the TCP/IP protocol stack.
This protocol is applied to assure that data packets arrive at the
target network element and to control the flow of data through the
Internet. Defined in RFC 793. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc793.html.
TDD
Time Division Duplexing. Synchronized data transmission with
some time slots allocated to devices transmitting on the uplink and
some to the device transmitting on the downlink.
telnet
Utility that allows a client computer to update a server. A firewall
can prevent the use of the telnet utility to breach the security of the
server. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc818.html,
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc854.html and
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc855.html.
Tokens
Theoretical amounts of data. See also Buckets.
TxUnderrun Field
This field displays how many transmission-underrun errors
occurred on the Ethernet controller.
UDP
User Datagram Protocol. A set of Network, Transport, and Session
Layer protocols that RFC 768 defines. These protocols include
checksum and address information but does not retransmit data or
process any errors. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc768.html.
udp
User-defined type of port.
U-NII
Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure radio frequency
band, in the 5.1-GHz through 5.8-GHz ranges.
VID
VLAN identifier. See also VLAN.
VLAN
Virtual local area network. An association of devices through
software that contains broadcast traffic, as routers would, but in the
switch-level protocol.
VPN
Virtual private network for communication over a public network.
One typical use is to connect remote employees, who are at home
or in a different city, to their corporate network over the Internet.
Any of several VPN implementation schemes is possible. SMs
support L2TP over IPSec (Level 2 Tunneling Protocol over IP
Security) VPNs and PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol) VPNs,
regardless of whether the Network Address Translation (NAT)
Page X
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting
Term
Registration and connectivity troubleshooting
Definition
feature enabled.
Page XI
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c015 81.157285, 2014/12/12-00:43:15 Create Date : 2015:10:19 22:32:44Z Creator Tool : Word Modify Date : 2015:10:19 17:32:45-05:00 Metadata Date : 2015:10:19 17:32:45-05:00 Keywords : Producer : Acrobat PDFMaker 15 for Word Format : application/pdf Title : Microsoft Word - 450i_900MHz.docx Document ID : uuid:aca29e75-a288-2d42-800c-9cfffd73f538 Instance ID : uuid:2a89475d-c763-d44d-acfe-391bed30a3a2 Page Count : 268 Creator : WordEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools